WSU ECEG Five Years Program Guide

Wolaita Sodo University
College of Engineering
Program of Electrical and Computer Engineering
Electrical Engineering, Bachelor of Science

(Electrical Power, Communication, Computer,
Industrial Control and Microelectronics Focus Areas)
Regular Five Year Program
Imprint
The document is adopted and prepared by
The Program of Electrical and Computer Engineering
Modularization Committee
Wolaita Sodo, September 2012
WSU ECEG Five Years Program
September 2012
TABLE OF CONTENS
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 3
Academic Background of Students ..................................................................................... 5
OBJECTIVES .................................................................................................................... 6
General Objectives ................................................................................................................. 6
Specific Objectives.................................................................................................................. 6
Professional Profile ................................................................................................................ 7
General Activities ................................................................................................................... 7
Graduate profile8
Basic Abilities, Skills .............................................................................................................. 8
Engineering Knowledge ....................................................................................................... 8
Profiles for Streams (Focus Areas)....................................................................................... 9
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PROGRAM.................................................................... 11

Rationale of the Curriculum ............................................................................................... 11
Structure of the Curriculum ............................................................................................... 12
Lecture Oriented Categories............................................................................................... 14
Practice Oriented Categories .............................................................................................. 17
Teaching-Learning Methods and Materials ..................................................................... 20
The European Credit Transfer System (ECTS) ................................................................ 21
Program Composition ......................................................................................................... 21
Course List ............................................................................................................................ 22
Modularization of Courses ................................................................................................. 27
Course Sequence32
Students Admission to the Program ................................................................................. 37
Examination and Grading .................................................................................................. 38
Graduation Requirements .................................................................................................. 41
Degree Nomenclature ......................................................................................................... 41
APPENDIX ..................................................................................................................... 42
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE MODULES AND COURSE HANDBOOK ............. 42
First Group Common Modules and Courses ................................................................... 42
Electronic Communication Focus Modules and Courses ............................................ 131
1
September 2012
Electrical Power Focus Modules and Courses ............................................................... 172

Computer Focus Modules and Courses ......................................................................... 200
Industrial Control Focus Modules and Courses............................................................ 236
Microelectronics Focus Modules and Courses .............................................................. 265
Second Group Common Module and Courses.............................................................. 302
September 2012
Introduction
In the modern-days, development of a country mainly depends on the development of
the industries. The development of these sectors significantly depends on the standard
of technical education nurtured by the universities and the technical institutes of the
country. It is observed that most of the developed countries maintain a strong
relationship between the universities and the industries. It is believed that the
universities are the gateway of new technologies. Universities develop new
technologies and by co-operating with industries they implement these technologies to
raise the standard and effectiveness of the industry. Universities take the
responsibilities to provide technical human resources for the industries of any country.
The Program of Electrical and Computer Engineering (ECE) is one of the newly
opened programs in the School of Engineering in Wolaita Sodo University. The
Program has started enrolling students since September 2011. Although the
commencement of the Program is in its inception period, it is committed into bringing
up talented, knowledgeable and professional workforce.
The core strategy of the Department is to pursue its vision and mission to enhance its
research, linkage with industry, academic and scholarly activities and become a center
of excellence for its programs.
Vision Statement
The ECE Program aspires to excel in teaching, research, and industry
linkage/consultancy at a national level as well as regionally and also in producing
competent engineers within the field of electrical, electronic, Communication, and
computer engineering to solve the problem of our country and bring about
growth.
Realization of this vision requires focusing on specializations relevant to the need
of the country; namely, Communication, Electrical Power, Computer, Control,
and Microelectronics engineering. This in turn requires institutional
reorganization such as upgrading to faculty level where each discipline may have
its own Program.
The attainment of this vision will require hard work on the part of School/
Program, staff, and students. This effort will require collaboration with the
administration, alumni, industrial friends, different organizations and other
universities.
3
September 2012
Mission Statement
The ECE Program is preparing young men and women to lead productive and
rewarding professional lives at the forefront of Engineering in the 21st century and
pursues research and linkage with the industry to advance the state-of-the-art in
electrical and computer engineering education.
Todays electrical and computer engineers must be able to find solutions to new
complex and challenging technical problems. They must have strong scientific,
technical and managerial skills and be able to integrate technical concepts with
practical applications. This Curriculum gives more attention to:
Current technological advancement in the area,
The demand from the industries (need of the country),
Increasing the linkage between the industry and the faculty,
Enhancing the innovative and problem solving skill of the graduates.
Taking into consideration the requirements of modern industries, The Program
implements the following five specializations (streams) in the present undergraduate
engineering course.
Electronic Communication Engineering,
Electrical Power Engineering,
Computer Engineering,
Industrial Control Engineering, and
Microelectronics Engineering.
September 2012
Academic Background of Students

Ethiopian schooling is up to 10th grade with a national examination at the end of the
10th grade. Then students with good passing grade in the national exam join two-year
preparatory study to join higher learning institutions. After completing the
preparatory, there is a national examination again. Those who passed the national
exam will join Universities.
In the curriculum, students who join the School of Engineering, Wolaita Sodo
University, further study for one semester as pre-engineering students. In this
assessment semester they are more prepared academically as well as psychologically
for University education and life. They take basic science, mathematics, and
fundamental engineering courses with some humanity and social science courses. At
the end of the semester, these students take examinations on all subjects and who
successfully passed the exam have the possibility to join the Program. The interest to
join the Program is so high that the Program has the advantage of getting the best
students.
September 2012
Objectives
General Objectives
To train high level technical manpower which can participate in the national
development activities;
To carry out research in the areas of electrical and computer engineering and
relevant to the needs of the Country;
To render consultancy services to the community.
Specific Objectives
To train electrical and computer engineers.
To prepare graduates with the capability of following the current and future
developments in the field and related applications.
To enable graduates work as a team in addressing technical problems which
may be encountered in industry and in real life?
To provide opportunity for workers in the field of electrical technology to
upgrade their knowledge through a continuing education/ evening program.
To provide graduates with sufficient background to undertake postgraduate
training in any one of the various specialized areas of Electrical Engineering
discipline.
To engage students in research that offers optimal solutions to technical
problems in the industry, energy sector, telecommunications, computer
applications and other industrial sectors.
To offer consultancy service to government, industry and society.
September 2012
Professional Profile
Definition:
Professional Profile: is a set of key occupational tasks.
Graduate Profile: is a set of graduate talent after the students have taken the
modules stated under the program.
Electrical and Computer Engineering is the branch of engineering that deals with the
technology of electricity and electronics, especially the design and application of
electronic circuit, equipment for power generation and distribution, machine control,
communications and computer hardware and software.
General Activities
Electrical and computer engineering aims to cover the broadest spectrum of activities
among the engineering disciplines: These are listed as follows
Research and Development

Developing new products on existing or new technologies.
Applied research on new technologies and improving the existing technology.
Design
Designing of required system and /or devices for indigenization (modifying)
Designing of interface unit to adapt existing devices with new system.
Modifying existing system to enhance its utilization.
Production/Manufacturing
Supervising, modifying and optimizing manufacturing process to improve cost
effective yields with quality.
Installation, Operation and Maintenance

After understanding the procedures as given in manual of manufacturer, ability
to install, operate and maintain the systems.
Analysis and Testing

Analyzing and developing test set-ups for testing system/devices to assess the
quality, safety and reliability of performance of the system.
Trouble shooting and repairing the system.
7
September 2012
Sales, Consultation and Purchase

Sales person for National/ International Companies.
Consulting Companies to optimize the price-performance of systems.
Defining and justifying the requirements for sales and purchase.
Graduate profile
After completing the courses successfully the graduates of this program should have:-
Basic Abilities, Skills

Able to understand the state of art techniques, devices, software, protocols.
Proceeding in methodical approach to solve problems.
Being a team member communicative, cooperative and transparent.
Working independently, assuming responsibility.
Leading, motivating and caring professionals.
Managing the project, productions, manpower and resources cost effectively.
Learning life-long, improving the skills and exploring new areas.
Observing national and international standards and regulation.
Engineering Knowledge
Fundamental knowledge in engineering mathematics.
Fundamental knowledge in physics, EM fields, semiconductors, electrical
materials, thermodynamics, static and dynamics.
Knowledge in electrical machines, electronic analogue and digital circuits,
signal & system, measurements, control, microprocessor and communication.
Knowledge in computer hardware and software.
Profiles for Streams (Focus Areas)

On their specific focus areas the graduates of this program should able to:-
Electrical Engineer with Electronic Communication Engineering Focus

Design and test electronic circuits.
8
September 2012
Design and maximize the utilization of communication network efficiently and

with the least possible delay and adequate quality.
Able to carry out research in the area of system design/networking and bring
solution in operational settings.
Able to solve problems in intensive signal processing and routing of
information packets.
Electrical Engineer with Electrical Power Engineering Focus

Plan, design, analyze, develop, operate, control and maintain of electrical
power plants (thermal, hydro, renewable), power apparatus and protection
system.
Plan, design, analyze and develop power transmission and distribution system.
Design, analysis, construction, installation, control, operation and maintenance
of electrical machines, power electronic devices and drives.
Electrical Engineer with Computer Engineering Focus

Design, develop, analyze and test the hardware and software for systems
applicable to any industries, business, hospitals, institutions and offices.
Install, operate and maintain computer systems.
Work as a computer hardware engineer, software engineer, system analyst, data
communication analyst, computer network engineer, database analyst, data
administrator, network administrator, information systems quality assurance
analyst, information system consultant, system tester, system security analyst,
customer support analyst, system auditor, computer service engineer, web
designer, webmaster, interactive media developer.
Electrical Engineer with Industrial Control Engineering Focus

Design, develop and analyze of control and instrumentation system applied for
monitoring, data acquisition and data analysis of electrical and non-electrical
systems including digital, analogue, robust and higher order controllers.
Plan, produce, install, implement, operate and maintain the control and
instrumentation systems.
Electrical Engineer with Microelectronics Engineering Focus

Design, develop, produce and test microelectronic systems applicable to
industries, business, hospitals, and institutions.
Work as microelectronic engineer, consultant, and system tester.
9
10
September 2012
September 2012
Bachelor of Science Program

Rationale of the Curriculum
Engineering in general and electrical/electronic engineering in particular is a highly
dynamic field of study in that the rapid development of the technology doesnt allow
leaving academic curricula untouched for a long time. Thus, to minimize the gap
between the state of the art and the teaching process and maintain the relevance and
educational standard, there is always a need for curricula review.
The basic rationale for all focus areas of the program are the prevailing conditions in
the Country with respect to the needs for professionals in this area and the future
trends that are developing in the demands for the profession. The Departments
programs keenly follow the developments in this regard both within the Country and
internationally and the following provide some of the major facts and observations on
which these programs premised.
1. Through the experience of other Universities that have been offering

undergraduate training in the Electrical Engineering discipline, the
undergraduate instructions have significantly developed reflecting both the
national needs and the rapid growth of the discipline.
2. Ethiopia, like many of the developing countries, is essentially a user of
products of Electrical Engineering technology. The current undergraduate
program, which has matured through a series of evolutionary changes over the
years, is designed so as to meet the needs of the main employers of the
graduates in the operation and maintenance of electrical and electronic
equipment and machines. To meet these needs the program is made broad
enough to cover most major areas of electrical engineering such as power,
electronics, communications, control, and computers without any particular
specialization.
3. It is still logical to maintain the broad nature of the undergraduate curricula that
affords the graduates versatility in terms of employment. But it has now
become necessary to look ahead to the future needs of the Country and provide
educational means to meet these needs. The current revision of the curricula
has therefore sought to address these through strengthening all focus areas.
With the advent of microelectronics, computers and computer-based equipment have
found wider application in industry and other sectors. The declining prices for these
equipments have also made them affordable and therefore accessible to large
11
September 2012
segments in industry. Computer applications have now been diversified and the
traditional use of the computer in data processing and other computational application
are only a small part of these diverse applications.
The convergence of computers & communication technologies has made it imperative
to provide education that imports knowledge & skill in these two fields concurrently.
The Electrical Engineering Program is well placed to offer such a program through its
currently revised programs.
This ECE degree program is a 5-year program, including industry internship semester,
which prepares graduates for careers as professional engineers in such areas as
communications, power system, computer, industrial control, and microelectronics.
The training provided should be versatile and enables graduates to work in research,
design, development, manufacturing, quality control, marketing, sales and technical
support, and as entrepreneurs, consultants and teachers.
The aim is to produce electrical engineers who are flexible across various disciplines;
and are able to apply their knowledge and skills to lead multi-disciplinary teams to
solve the increasingly complex problems of the industry and technology.
Structure of the Curriculum

The new ECE curriculum focuses on broad-based training to provide flexibility of
career choices and focused training to provide competence in particular electrical
engineering profession. It finds balance between breadth and depth to provide a solid
foundation in the basic engineering, mathematics, electrical engineering on one hand,
and comprehensive training in humanities and management on the other.
The assessment semester is intended to consolidate the students' educational
background for higher learning and further help them to adapt to the system. In the
five consecutive semesters, after the common assessment semester, all the students
take courses mainly in the core electrical engineering category. This provides them
with a broad background for all areas of electrical and electronic engineering. At the
end of the sixth semester, the students will be taking a holistic evaluation that requires
an overview of all the courses taken to make sure that they are ready for the focus area
studies and to indicate inclination of students towards the focus area.
In the final two years, students are given the opportunity to focus on one of the five
areas, namely communication engineering, electrical power engineering, computer
engineering, industrial control engineering and microelectronics engineering as shown
12
September 2012
Admission
1 Common Assessment Semester

Humanity & Social Sciences
Engineering Sciences & Mathematics
5 Common Semesters
Core Electrical Engineering
Holistic
Examination
Focus?
1 Semester
Communication
Engineering
1 Semester
1 Semester
Electrical Power
Engineering
1 Semester
Computer
Engineering
Industrial Control
Engineering
1 Semester
Microelectronic
Engineering
Industry Internship Semester
2 Focus Area Semesters

and
B.Sc. Thesis
Graduation
in the flowchart. The students are placed to the streams based on their inclination, the
holistic exam result and the cumulative grade point (CGPA)
13
September 2012
Lecture Oriented Categories

a) Humanity and Social Science Category
This category has the following main objectives:
To helps the students to know the responsibilities and duties of a good citizen,
so that their participation in the development of democratic society becomes
effective;
To create the power of critical thinking; the category provides the techniques &
methods for testing the correctness of many different kind of reasoning
including their own and thereby errors are easily detected;
To develop effective ways of expressing themselves as well as expressing the
technical details in terms of speaking and writing of English;
To understand the role of the cost effective methods of doing every task, the
students are exposed to the role of economics in society and the role of
engineering economy;
To understand the role of managers, applicable to different departments of
various industries.
b) Scientific and Engineering Fundamentals Category

This category helps the student to learn the engineering languages like that of
Mathematics and Engineering Drawing and also provides the fundamental concepts of
Physics for the electrical engineers. It helps the students
To understand and apply the various concepts of calculus, differential
equations, linear algebra and various engineering series and sequences;
To understand and express random events for representing the behaviors of
signals embedded in noises;
To be able to apply various computational methods for modeling technical
operations;
To understand the fundamental concepts of Statics, and Dynamics for
engineering applications;
To know and practice the representation in engineering drawing.
14
September 2012
c) Core Electrical Engineering Category

This category is the heart of the curriculum, which provides foundation for the
electrical engineering. At later stage students can take up the studies of specialization
on any other branches of Electrical Engineering.
To understand the fundamental concepts of electrical and electronic
engineering;
To understand the concept of computer architecture and programming and able
to apply to real life applications;
To understand and analyze electrical networks, signal, and systems;
To be able to understand the concept of various electrical machines and
electrical power system; comprehend
To learn the digital signal processing techniques and to bring solution to the
problems of real time signal;
To understand the microprocessor and micro controller and their interfacing
and to be able to handle these hardware;
To understand the fundamentals of electronic communication and control
system.
d) Electronic Communication Engineering Focus

Communication engineering involves the transfer of information such as voice, music,
data, videos or graphics, between people or machines at different locations. This focus
area helps the student to get the exposure on the fundamentals of most commonly used
electronic communication techniques in telecommunication and data communication
systems. These students will be able to undertake the higher studies on Electronic
Communication. On the completion of courses in this stream students will be able:
To participate in design and maximize the utilization of communication links
and network efficiently and with the least possible delay and adequate quality;
To participate in research in the area of system design/networking and bring
solutions in operational settings;
To solve problems in intensive signal processing and routing of information
packets.
15
September 2012
e) Electrical Power Engineering Focus

Students will study power system planning, design, operation, protection and control.
They will gain basic knowledge of electrical power generation, transmission,
distribution and utilization of electrical energy. They will also study the economical
aspects of power generation, transmission and distribution systems. The focus area
offer courses to familiarize one with modern power system analysis, design, planning,
operation, control, and protection of power systems. At the end of the study, the
student is expected to:
To understand all the components of a power system including generation,
transmission, and distribution;
To participate in research in the area of system design/networking and bring
solutions in operational settings;
To solve power system problems.
f) Computer Engineering Focus

Computer Engineering involves the design and analysis of computer systems. It
encompasses both hardware and software design. The focus area offers courses such
as computer architecture, microcomputer, software engineering, computer networking
and others. At the end of the study, the student is expected to:
To understand all the components of a computer hardware and software
components;
To participate in research in the area of system design/networking;
g) Industrial Control Engineering Focus

Students will study the characteristics and designs of industrial automation process.
Control and automation is one of the fast growing branches of electrical engineering
with the advent of electronics and computer. Its application and employment
opportunity are almost everywhere in industry and commercial offices. In this focus
area process control, industrial automation, modern and digital control engineering,
power electronics and drive courses, are given in depth to prepare the student for
practical challenges in real world and for post graduate study.
At the end of the study, the student is expected to:
To assist in the analysis and design of practical industrial control systems;
To participate in research in the area of industrial control and instrumentation
system;
16
September 2012
To solve industry problems that can result in maximum efficiency and

productivity.
h) Microelectronics Engineering Focus

Microelectronic engineering encompasses the design, manufacture and testing of
electronic circuits and systems based on microelectronic components. Microelectronic
technology has revolutionized the design of consumer goods, scientific and medical
instrumentation. This stream offers students with course such as microelectronic
circuit design, integrated circuit technology, VLSI and CAD of electronic circuits.
At the end of the study, the student is expected to:
To contribute to the development of microelectronic industry;
To participate in analysis and design of microelectronic circuits and also carry
out researches in the area.
Practice Oriented Categories

a)
Introduction to Engineering
During the assessment semester, just before the students choose which Department
they will join, a 2-credit course is given to introduce the engineering profession as a
whole and also to give the students the opportunity to deal with the basic technical
skills from the wood work, metal work, electrical work and masonry work. After the
assessment semester, each department offers a series of practice-oriented courses such
as workshops and semester projects.
b)
Workshop Courses
The students, during the assessment semester, will have the chance to hands-on
exercises dealing with basic metalwork, woodwork, masonry, and electricity. This will
help them know the basic workshop activities and also choose their field of study from
the available engineering disciplines.
After the assessment semester, the students will have a series of workshop courses
specific to their field of specialization.
c)
Semester Project
The 2-credit course (Semester Project) is given to a group of not more than three
students in which the group has to present the results of the semester work to staff of
the Department. It is believed that students get introduced to methods of problem
solving, team work and presentation skill before the B.Sc. thesis.
17

d)
September 2012
Internship (Industry Placement)
In industry internship students must be attached with an industry for one regular
semester in order to get real world experience in their field of study, which
compliments their education.
General
The pre-requisite for registration in the industry attachment program is successful
completion of all semesters before the internship program. At the end of their
internship, the student and the internship coach at the industry have to submit a report
on the attachment program, which is evaluated at the departmental committee with
pass or fail grade. Students who cannot obtain a pass mark for the internship program
will not be allowed to register for the next semester. They will be advised to repeat the
semester with the next batch of students.
The condition while undergoing the internship, the daily and monthly working times
follow the systems practiced in the respective industry for the upper middle-level
management. Specifically, they follow the system practiced in the respective company
that hosts the student. As a rule, the entire internship period has to be spent in a single
company; a change of company during the internship period will only be permitted
under extraordinary circumstances. In such a case, the decision is with the Faculty
Internship Coordinator.
A seminar program, organized by the Schools Internship Coordinator will accompany
the internship semester. Participation in the seminar program is compulsory
(mandatory).
At the end of the internship, the student submits to the Schools Internship
Coordinator a comprehensive report, duly endorsed by the students host company.
The report is assigned 30 ECTS. The required format and assessment of the report is
detailed in the Curriculum Handbook for the Program. The report will be assessed by
specifically assigned internship program evaluator (or university professors/lecturers).
Objectives
The internship program has the following objective(s):
Expansion of knowledge and acquaintance with industry in the field of
Electrical and Computer Engineering.
Consolidation and deepening of existing knowledge in the Electrical and
Computer Engineering design and construction industry.
Participation in the development, manufacture and assembly of products typical
18
September 2012
for the industry.

Involvement in the planning, steering and management of the design &
construction processes.
Hands-on training in practical skills typical for the industry. Typically, this
would be participation individually or within a (task) group in real
assignments/projects, which entail the application of knowledge and skills
attained so far during the studies at University and aiming at developing
special skills related to the industrial practice in one or several of the following
fields (depending on the type of industry and company profile):
o Design and construction.
o Laboratory (quality monitoring) work.
o Task management (labor management, logistics).
o Business management, Marketing.
Academic Requirements
The academic requirements for entry into the internship (industry-placement semester)
is the successful completion of the holistic examination, which encompasses all parts
of the study program completed until the end of the 6th semester.
As is indicated in the description of the Internship Module, the Internship program
creates the opportunity for the students to familiarize themselves with the Industry.
The office should look for interested employers form the private and public sectors. It
should also create permanent contact with the Construction Industry and with the
newly emerging Automotive and Textile Industry. The private sectors involve among
others consulting offices and construction firms. The public sector involves the Design
Enterprises established in the Country. The Duration of the internship should be one
semester and it must not necessarily carry any credits. However, it should be
mandatory.
Proof of Finishing an Internship Semester
In order to acknowledge an internship semester, the student must submit a written
report to the Internship Coordinator. This must be signed by the students host
company. This report is written solely by the student and contains information on the
working-out of larger or smaller themes, with which the student is confronted during
the work in the company. It can include literature study. The report must document the
areas in which the student has worked and the specific knowledge obtained as a result.
For the internship, the host company must issue a certificate on the industry project.
19
September 2012
At the end of the internship the student has to make a presentation (final seminar) on
the results of the industry project.
The internship semester is granted 30 ECTS points if the student has successfully
passed the semester.
Cost
All matters related to the cost of the internship process will follow Government
legislations. The following items should be included in the budget preparation:
Insurance (accident during work & trips to/from work)
Long-distance travel cost (if company is far from University, e.g. another
region)
Daily travel to/from work
Travel to/from University (e.g. from location of company) to attend the
mandatory seminar
program organized by the University (if any)
Accommodation, if the workplace is far from the University
Cost for printing the comprehensive report
Remuneration for the internship from the company, if any.
e)
B.Sc. Thesis
The B.Sc. Thesis is the final element of the B.Sc. study program. The main goal of
this course is to develop the individual creative and problem solving ability of
graduates. Students will receive an individual project specification from various areas
and work them out individually under the supervision of faculty advisor or/and
professional advisor from the industry. The candidate use all the theoretical
knowledge and practical skill he obtained during his/her study to solve the engineering
problem in a scientific way which includes problem analysis, solution, verification,
implementation, documentation, and presentation. B.Sc. Thesis is defended in front of
the official committee at the end of the study.
Teaching-Learning Methods and Materials

The basic teaching method is gapped lecture supported by tutorial, design projects,
practical laboratory exercises and, in some cases, by simulation. Audio-visual aids are
also used to support gapped lectures. Students are assigned to work on design projects
to enable them enhance innovative and independent working ability. The industry
internship is also an integral part of the teaching-learning process. Students are
provided with handouts and teaching materials.
20
September 2012
The European Credit Transfer System (ECTS)

The conventional credit system used in higher education systems is mainly based on
student contact hours in class and laboratory sessions. A new system of credit system
is introduced that takes the extra hours a student spends for the course in addition to
lectures, tutorials, and laboratory practices. In ECTS credits are values, allocated to
course units, to describe the student workload required to complete a course including
attending lectures, seminars, independent and private study, preparation of projects
and examinations.
In this revised curriculum, the ECTS equivalent of the old credit system has been
estimated and shown for each course in the course breakdown. In ECTS, one credit
stands for 27 hours of work activity. A semester study within this system is set at 30
ECTS points (810 hrs).
Program Composition
The total credit hour requirement for graduation in any one of the streams is 158
credits (300ECTS) of which 105 credits (181ECTS) are covered during the first six
common semesters composed of courses from the three basic categories: Humanity
and social science, Scientific and engineering fundamentals and Core electrical
engineering. The remaining credit hours, i.e., 53 credit hours (120ECTS), are given
during the last four focus area semesters which consists of Focus area courses,
Internship and B.Sc. Thesis. The categories are summarized in the following table.
Category
Humanity and Social Science
Scientific & Engineering Fundamentals
Core Electrical Engineering
Focus Area
Internship
B.Sc. Thesis
ECTS
25
67
103
64
30
12
Total
Percent
8.00%
22.33%
34.40%
21.44%
10.07%
4.00%
301
A student is expected to choose one of the five focus areas Electronic Communication,
Electrical Power, Computer, Industrial Control or Microelectronics Engineering at the
end of the sixth semester.
21
September 2012
Course Coding
The four-digit course (ECEG-xxxx) numbering system allows one to identify the year
(the first digit), the module (the second and third digits) and order of the course in the
module (the last digit).
Courses List per catagory

Humanity and Social Science 19 Cr.hrs (25ECTS)
Course No
Course Title
ECTS
Cr.
ECEG-2033
Lec. Tut Lab
HS
Technical Report Writing
ECEG-5161
Research Methods and Presentation
Econ-1035
Introduction to Economics
Flen-1034
Sophomore English
MEng-5183
Entrepreneurship
Phil-1032
Logic
GeEd-1031
Civic Education
Scientific and Engineering Fundamentals 41Cr.hrs (68ECTS)

Course No
Course Title
ECTS
Cr.
CEng-1041
Engineering Mechanics I (Statics)
GEng-1011
Introduction to Engineering Skill
Math-1021
Applied Mathematics I
MEng-1012
Technical Drawing
Math-1022
Applied Mathematics II
MEng-1042
Engineering Mechanics II (Dynamics)
ECEG-2051
Applied Modern Physics
Math-2023
Applied Mathematics III
MEng-2043
Engineering Thermodynamics
ECEG-2024
Computational Methods
ECEG-3114
Probability & Random Processes
MEng-5182
Industrial Management & Engg

Economy
MEng-5181
Quality Management
22
Lec. Tut Lab
HS
September 2012
Internship (30ECTS)
Course No
Course Title
ECEG-5171
Industry Internship
ECTS Cr. Lec. Tut Lab

30
P/F
Cr.
Lec
.
Tut
Lab
HS
Core Electrical Engineering 59 Cr.hrs (105ECTS)

Course No
Course Title
ECTS
ECEG-1061
Fundamental of Electrical Engineering
ECEG-1062
Electrical Engineering Lab I
ECEG-2071
Applied Electronics I
ECEG-2072
Applied Electronics II
ECEG-2063
Electrical Workshop Practice I
ECEG-2093
Electrical Workshop Practice II
ECEG-2073
Electrical Engineering Lab II
ECEG-2074
Electrical Engineering Lab III
ECEG-2101
Introduction to Computing
ECEG-2081
Signals and Systems Analysis
ECEG-2052
Electromagnetic Fields
ECEG-3101
Digital Logic Design
ECEG-3102
Computer Architecture &

Organization
ECEG-3091
Introduction to Electrical Machines
ECEG-3103
Object Oriented Programming
ECEG-3053
Electrical Materials and Technology
ECEG-3111
Introduction to Control Engineering
ECEG-3092
Electrical Engineering Lab IV
ECEG-3113
Electrical Engineering Lab V
ECEG-3082
Network Analysis & Synthesis
ECEG-3112
Introduction to Communication
Systems
ECEG-3083
Digital Signal Processing
23
September 2012
Electronic Communication Engineering Stream 46Cr.hrs (76ECTS)

Course No
Course Title
ECTS
Cr.
Lec
Tut
Lab
HS
ECEG-4141
Communication Systems
ECEG-4151
EM Waves and Guide Structures
ECEG-5143
Telecommunication Networks
ECEG-5191
B.Sc. Thesis
12
18
ECEG-5152
Antennas and Radio Wave

Propagation
ECEG-5155
Wireless and Mobile

Communications
ECEG-5153
Microwave Devices and Systems
ECEG-5144
Switching and Intelligent Networks
ECEG-5162
Semester Project
ECEG-5154
Optics and Optical Communication
ECEG-4131
Microcomputers and Interfacing
ECEG-4132
Introduction to Instrumentation
2
3
ECEG-4142
Data Communication & Computer

Networks
ECEG-4121
Microelectronic Devices and

Circuits or
ECEG-4121
Data Structures
Electrical Power Engineering Stream 43Cr.hrs (76ECTS)

Course No
Course Title
ECTS
Cr.
Lec
.
Tut
La
b
HS
ECEG-4151
Electrical Installation
ECEG-4141
Power Systems I
ECEG-4152
Energy Conversion and Rural

Electrification
ECEG-4131
Electrical Machines
ECEG-5132
Power Electronics & Electric Drives
ECEG-5191
B.Sc. Thesis
12
18
ECEG-5142
Power Systems II
ECEG-5144
Power System Protection & Control
ECEG-5153
Hydropower Engineering
ECEG-5145
Computer Applications in Power

System
24
September 2012
ECEG-5162
Semester Project
ECEG-5143
Power System Planning and

Operation
ECTS
Cr
Lec
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4122
Modern Control Systems
5
5
Computer Engineering Stream 43Cr.hrs (76ECTS)

Course No
Course Title
ECEG-4122
ECEG-4133
Data Communication & Computer

Networks
ECEG-4131
Data Structures
ECEG-4132
Database Systems
ECEG-5141
Algorithm Analysis & Design
ECEG-5191
B.Sc. Thesis
12
18
ECEG-5143
Software Engineering
ECEG-5151
Embedded Systems
ECEG-5142
Programming Languages
ECEG-5162
Semester Project
ECEG-5152
Operating Syste ms
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4123
VLSI Design
ECEG-5153
Intro. to Robotics & Industrial

Automation
3
3
3
Tut Lab
HS
Industrial Control Engineering Stream 43Cr.hrs (76ECTS)

Course No
Course Title
ECT
S
Cr.
Lec
.
Tut
La
b
HS
ECEG-4132
ECEG-5133
Instrumentation Engineering
ECEG-5191
B.Sc. Thesis
12
18
ECEG-5151
Process Control Fundamentals
ECEG-5152

Automation
ECEG-5134
Digital Control Systems
ECEG-5162
Semester Project
ECEG-4121
25
September 2012
ECEG-4122
Power Systems I
ECEG-4123
Electrical Machines
ECEG-5124
Power Electronics & Electric Drives
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4141
ECEG-5142
Embedded system
5
3
5
5
Microelectronics Engineering Stream 44Cr.hrs (76ECTS)

Course Code
Course Title
ECTS Cr.hr Lec. Tut Lab
ECEG-4121
Microelectronic Devices and

Circuits
ECEG-4123
VLSI Design
ECEG-5151
Integrated Circuit Technology
ECEG-5191
B.Sc. Thesis
12
18
ECEG-5122
CAD of Electronic Circuits
ECEG-4152
PCB Technology and Application
ECEG-5143
Optoelectronics
ECEG-5162
Semester Project
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4132
Communication system
ECEG-4133
ECEG-4141
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5144
Wireless and Mobile

Communication
26
HS
September 2012
Modularization of Courses
The course offered are set into 19 modules which consist of a maximum of six courses
to be offered in 2-4 consecutive semesters. The modules associate courses that are
having consecutiveness and direct relation.
The modules are grouped in to three groups as:
First group common courses: courses in the modules in this group are taken
by all the students in the Program in their first six semesters.
Focus Area Courses: courses in the modules in this group are taken after the
students have selected their focus area of study.
Second group common courses: courses in the modules of this group are
taken after the students have joined their study of focus. However, Semester
Project and B.Sc. Thesis course in this group are taken by all students; their
contents are specific to the focus areas of the students study.
The modules are listed in the tables below.
First Group Common Courses (180ECTS)

Module No
01
Module Name
Basics of Engineering
skills
Course
Sem.
1
ECTS
4
Technical Drawing
Total
9
02
Applied Mathematics
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
6
25
03
Humanities & language
Civic Education
16
Logic
Sophomore English
1
2
2
1
3
3
4
3
Engineering Mechanics I
Engineering mechanics II
2
3
5
5
04
05
Engineering mechanics
and Thermodynamics
Applied Physics and

electrical materials
27
15
15
06
Basics of Electrical
Engineering
07
Applied Electronics
08
Signals and Network

Analysis
09
10
11
Basics of Electrical
machines
Computer Engineering
Basics of communication
& control Engineering
September 2012
Electrical Materials
&Technology
4
5
5
5
Fundamental of Electrical
Engineering
2
3
3
4
3
4
4
2
2
6
5
3
3
7

5
6
6
5
Introduction to Electrical
Machines
5
4
3
4

Organization
Introduction to Control
Engineering
Systems
5
6
6
5
6
3
6
5
5
5
6
5
6
6
Focus Area (59ECTS)

Electronic Communication Focus
Module
Module Name
No
Course
Sem. ECTS Total
12
Elective
Data Structure
OR
Microelectronic Devices & Circuits
13
Instrumentation and
Interfacing
Microcomputers & Interfacing
10
14
Communication System
and Network
28
20
10
17
18
12
21
22

Module
Module Name
No
September 2012
Course
Data Comm. & Computer
Networks
Switching and Intelligent
Networks
15
Micro-waves and
Antennas

Propagation
Microwave Devices and
Systems
Optics and Optical
Communication
Wireless & Mobile
Communication
Sem. ECTS Total

7
10
10
24
Electrical Power Focus

Module
Module Name
No
Instrumentation and
12
Control
13
14
15
Machines and Drives
Power Engineering
Energy Conversion and

Distribution
Course
Sem. ECTS Total
Electrical Machines
Power Electronics & Electric
Drives
Power Systems I
Power Systems II
Power System Planning &
Operation
Power System Protection &
Control
Computer Applications in Power
Systems
7
9
5
5
10
10
Energy Conversion & Rural
Electrification
29
10
25
15
September 2012
Computer Focus
Module
Module Name
No
Interfacing and Control
12
13
14
15
Data Storage and Data

communication
Programming and
software Engineering
Control and Automation
Course
Sem. ECTS Total
VLSI Design
7
7
7
5
5
5
15
Data Structures
15
Database Systems
Data Communication and
Computer Networks
Algorithm Analysis and Design
9
9
9
10
5
5
5
5
10
Programming Language
Operating System
Embedded System
Introduction to Robotics and
Industrial Automation
14
15
Industrial Control Focus

Module
Module Name
No
Electric Power &
12
Drives
13
Instrumentation and
Control
Course
Sem. ECTS Total
Power System I
Electrical Machines
Power Electronics and Electric
Drives
7
7
5
5

7
9
9
5
5
5
19
20
14
Microcontroller
Microcomputer and Interfacing

Embedded Systems
7
10
5
5
10
15
Control Application

Introduction to Robotics and
industrial Automation
10
10
30
September 2012
Microelectronics Focus
Module
Module Name
No
Electronic Circuits and
12
Design
13
14
15
Instrumentation and
Interfacing
EM Waves and
Microwave Devices
IC & PCB Technology
Course
Sem. ECTS Total
Microelectronic Devices &

Circuits
VLSI Design
9
7
5
5
7
7
5
5

Optoelectronics
Wireless & Mobile
Communication
9
9
5
4
10
9
10
5
5
15
15
19
10
Second Group Common Courses (61ECTS)

Module
No
16
Module Name
Course
Sem. ECTS Total
Project and Presentation
Research Methods and

Presentation
Semester Project
17
Internship
Industry Internship
30
30
18
Entrepreneurship and
Management Skills
Quality Management
12
10
10
10
4
12
19
Thesis
Industrial Management &

Engineering Economy
Entrepreneurship
B.Sc. Thesis
31
12
September 2012
Course Sequence
Common Semesters
Semisrers
Sem I
GEng-1011
CEng-1041
MEng-1012
Math-1021
Flen-1034
Econ-1035
Phil-1032
Sem II
ECEG-1061
ECEG-1062
GeEd-1031
Flen-1034
MEng-1042
Math-1042
ECEG-1033
Sem III
ECEG-2051
ECEG-2071
ECEG-2063
ECEG-2205
ECEG-2101
ECEG-2023
MEng-2043
Sem IV
ECEG-2024
ECEG-2072
ECEG-2093
ECEG-2074
ECEG-2081
ECEG-2052
ECTS
Cr.hr
Lec
Tut.
Lab
HS
delivery

Engineering Mechanics I (Statics)
Technical Drawing
Sophomore English (Writing skills)
Logic
Total
3
5
5
6
4
3
3
28
2
3
3
4
3
3
3
17
1
2
2
4
3
3
3
14
3
3
2
-
3
-
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
2
5
5
6
5
7
5
29
Fundamental of Electrical
Engineering
Civic Education
Sophomore English (Writing skills)
Engineering Mechanics II(Dynamics)
Total
parallel
2
3
4
5
6
3
29
1
2
3
3
4
1
17
2
3
2
4
17
3
2
3
8
3
3
1
4
5
5
6
3
33
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel

Total
5
6
2
3
5
7
5
33
3
3
1
1
3
4
3
18
2
2
2
4
2
11
3
3
1
2
3
12
3
3
2
8
5
7
1
3
5
8
1
30
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
Total
6
5
4
3
7
5
30
3
3
2
1
4
3
17
2
2
3
2
9
1
3
3
3
13
2
6
3
11
7
5
2
3
8
5
33
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
Course title
32
September 2012
Common Semesters
Sem V
ECEG-3114
ECEG-3101
ECEG-3091
ECEG-3053
ECEG-3092
ECEG-3082
Sem VI
ECEG-3102
ECEG-3103
ECEG-3111
ECEG-3113
ECEG-3112
ECEG-3083

Introduction to Electrical
Machines
Electrical Materials and
Technology
Total
Organization
Introduction to Control
Engineering
Systems
Total
6
5
5
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
1
3
2
-
7
5
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
3
6
30
1
3
16
2
10
1
11
3
2
7
3
7
32
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
4
5
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
5
Parallel
Parallel
6
5
2
3
6
-
6
5
Parallel
Parallel
5
30
3
17
2
10
1
13
2
8
5
29
Parallel
Communication Focus
Sem VII
ECEG-4132
ECEG-4141
ECEG-4151
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4142
ECEG-4121
Electives
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4121
Sem VIII
ECEG-4101
Sem IX
ECEG-5161
ECEG-5143
ECEG-5152
ECEG-5153
Networks
Elective
Total
ECTS
Cr.
Lec
Tu
t
Lab
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
5
5
5
5
5
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
5
30
3
18
2
13
3
12
5
30
parallel
Data Structures
Circuits
6-Month Industry Internship
Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation
33
5
5
3
3
2
2
1
3
HS
2
-
5
5
30
P/F
2
5
5
5
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
5
5
5
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel

ECEG-5162
ECEG-5154
MEng-5181
Sem X
ECEG-5191
ECEG-5155
ECEG-5144
MEng-5182
MEng-5183
September 2012
Semester Project
Quality Management
Total
5
4
4
30
2
3
3
19
2
2
10
3
3
18
4
4
6
3
3
28
parallel
parallel
parallel
B.Sc. Thesis
Wireless & Mobile Communication
Economy
Entrepreneurship
Total
12
5
5
4
6
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
3
2
18
-
6
5
6
4
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
4
30
3
17
2
7
2
10
18
4
25
parallel
Electrical Power Focus

ECTS
Sem VII
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4151
ECEG-4141
ECEG-4152
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4122
Sem IX
ECEG-5161
ECEG-5132
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5153
ECEG-5162
ECEG-5143
MEng-5181
Sem X
ECEG-5191
ECEG-5144
ECEG-5145
MEng-5182
Tut
Lab
HS
Parallel
Power Systems I
Energy Conver. & Rural
Electrification
Electrical Machines
5
5
5
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
1
5
5
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
5
5
30
3
3
18
2
2
12
3
3
14
5
5
30
Parallel
Parallel
Total
Sem VIII
ECEG-4101
Cr. Lec
30
P/F

Presentation
Drives
Power Systems II
Semester Project
Power System Planning &
Operation
Quality Management
Total
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
5
5
5
5
3
3
2
3
2
2
2
1
3
3
2
4
-
5
5
6
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
4
30
3
19
2
10
3
14
3
28
Parallel
12
5
6
3
18
-
6
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
B.Sc. Thesis
Power System Protection &
Control
Computer Applications in
Power Systems
34

MEng-5183
Engg Economy
Entrepreneurship
Total
September 2012
4
30
3
17
2
7
2
10
18
Parallel
24
Computer Engineering Focus

ECTS
Sem VII
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4122
ECEG-4133
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4132
ECEG-4123
sem VIII
ECEG-4101
Sem IX
ECEG-5161
ECEG-5141
ECEG-5143
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5162
ECEG-5151
MEng-5181
Cr. Lec
Tut
Lab
HS
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Networks
Data Structures
Database Systems
VLSI Design
Total
5
5
5
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
30
3
3
3
18
2
2
2
12
1
1
1
6
2
2
2
12
5
5
5
30
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
30
P/F

Presentation
Algorithm Analysis & Design
Semester Project
Operating Systems
Quality Management
Total
Parallel
4
5
5
5
5
4
30
3
3
3
2
3
3
19
2
3
2
3
2
12
2
1
3
1
3
13
1
4
1
6
3
5
5
6
5
3
28
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
12
5
5
6
2
3
3
3
0
0
18
2
2
6
6
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
4
30
3
17
2
10
2
4
22
4
25
Parallel
Sem IX
Sem X
ECEG-5191
ECEG-5152
ECEG-5153
MEng-5182
MEng-5183
B.Sc. Thesis
Embedded Systems
Automation
Economy
Entrepreneurship
Total
35
September 2012
Industrial Control Focus

Sem VII
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4122
ECEG-4123
ECEG-4141
ECEG-4132
Sem VIII
ECEG-4101
Sem IX
ECEG-5161
ECEG-5124
ECEG-5133
ECEG-5151
ECEG-5134
ECEG-5162
MEng-5181
Sem X
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5191
ECEG-5152
MEng-5182
MEng-5183
ECTS
Cr.hr
Lec
Tut
Lab
HS
Power Systems I
Electrical Machines
Microcomputers and
Interfacing
Total
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
3
3
1
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
5
30
3
18
2
12
3
14
5
30
Parallel
30
P/F

Presentation
Drives
Semester Project
Quality Management
Total
Parallel
Parallel
5
5
5
5
4
30
3
3
3
2
3
19
2
2
2
2
10
1
3
1
3
12
2
2
4
10
5
5
5
6
3
28
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
5
12
5
2
6
3
1
3
3
0
18
2
6
6
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
4
30
3
17
2
8
2
7
20
4
25
Parallel
Embedded Systems
B.Sc. Thesis
Automation
Engg Economy
Entrepreneurship
Total
Microelectronics Focus
Sem VII
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4132
ECEG-4141
ECEG-4133
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4123
Sem VIII
ECEG-4101
ECTS
Cr.hr
Lec
Tut
Lab
HS
Circuits
VLSI Design
Total
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
3
1
3
2
2
-
5
5
5
5
5
Parallel
Parallel
Parallel
parallel
parallel
5
30
3
18
3
13
0
11
2
6
5
30
parallel
30
P/F
36

Sem IX
ECEG-5161
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5151
ECEG-5122
ECEG-5143
ECEG-5162
MEng-5181
Sem X
ECEG-5144
ECEG-5191
ECEG-5152
MEng-5182
MEng-5183
September 2012

Optoelectronics
Semester Project
Quality Management
Total
2
5
5
5
4
5
4
30
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
19
1
2
2
2
2
2
10
3
3
3
0
3
3
15
3
4
7
1
5
5
5
3
6
3
28
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
Wireless & Mobile Communication

B.Sc. Thesis
Economy
Entrepreneurship
Total
5
12
5
4
3
6
3
3
2
2
2
3
1
2
18
2
-
5
6
5
4
parallel
parallel
parallel
parallel
4
30
3
18
2
8
2
8
20
4
24
parallel
Students Admission to the Program

Admissions to all regular undergraduate programs are processed through the Ministry
of Education (MOE) of the Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia. This procedure
is currently applied for all public Higher Education Institutes across the whole nation.
Admissions to the continuing education program (CEP) are processed through the
universitys registrar office based on the criteria set by the University.
Admission to Regular Program

Students who have successfully completed the preparatory secondary education and
have secured a minimum cutoff point with high scores in Physics and Mathematics are
eligible to join the regular undergraduate B.Sc. degree program in Electrical and
Computer Engineering.
Depending on available spaces, diploma graduates from TVET (Technical Vocational
Education and Training) in the fields of Electrical and Computer Engineering will be
admitted based on grades on competitive basis.
Applicants with a minimum cutoff point and with high scores in Physics and
Mathematics in foreign countries examinations equivalent to preparatory program are
also eligible. The equivalence is determined by the Program of Electrical and
Computer Engineering.
37
September 2012
Admission to Continuing Education Program

The criteria set for admission to the regular program will be employed as the criteria
for admission to the continuing education program.
Candidates who are diploma graduates from an engineering school, TVET or similar
recognized college in the fields of Electrical and Computer Engineering with a
minimum cutoff point will be admitted based on space availability, and competitive
basis.
Limited numbers of junior staff such as technical assistants in relevant field may be
admitted each year based on non-competitive basis provided that he/she:
a) has served the University for a minimum of 5 consecutive years.
b) meet the minimum admission requirement set for the program.
c) obtain letter of recommendation from the Academic vice president.
d) sign a commitment to serve the University after graduation, at least two years
of service for one complete year of study.
Department Placement
After successful completion of the orientation semester (1st semester), students will
choose academic programs in engineering according to their desired field of study. In
view of the high number of applicants, admission to the Electrical and Computer
Engineering Program is usually on competitive basis based on academic performance.
Examination and Grading

At the end of each semester, the student sits for final examinations of the courses
he/she has attended (minimum 75% for lectures and tutorials, 100% for practical
exercises). A student must pass the examinations for all the courses in addition to the
Holistic Examination at the end of the sixth semester.
38
September 2012
Examination System
Most courses will be assessed by a combination of written and oral examinations.
Reports on project work should also be part and parcel of the assessment metrics. The
design activities shall be assessed entirely by course work and this often shall include
assessment of oral presentations.
According to the revised curriculum, in addition to regular quizzes, home works, and
assignments, the students will undertake two major exams for most courses, the first at
the middle (Mid-term Exam) and the second at the end of each semester (Final Exam).
Some senior courses may not have Mid-term Exams; instead students will be
evaluated based on project work. In addition, the students will take a holistic
examination covering all basic study modules before they leave for their internship.
In the final year, students should be required to present and defend their B.Sc. thesis
work in front of examining professors and interested audience.
Examination Pass-Fail Pathways

Pass Grade
Fail Grade
FX
Fail Grade
F
OK
Immediate repeat of
exam or part failed
(re-sit exam)
Pass Grade
OK
Fail Grade FX
Resultant Fail Grade

F
OK
Immediate repeat of
exam or part failed
(re-sit exam)
Pass Grade
Fail Grade FX
Re-take course or
failed part of course
Pass Grade
Fail Grade FX
Fail Grade F
39
Fail Grade F
End of study
OK
Resultant Fail
Grade F
End of study
September 2012
3.7
[85,89]
3.3
A-
[80,84]
3.0
B+
[75,80]
2.7
[70,74]
2.5
B-
[65,69]
2.3
C+
[58,64]
2.0
[50,57]
1.7
C-
[40,49]
1.3
ECTS
Conversi
on to the
Conventi
onal
Grading
System
Conventi
onal
Grade
Points
[90,94]
Class
Descrip0
tion
A+
A+
4.0
4.0
A-
3.75
3.5
Very
Good
First class
with Great
distinction
4.0
Excellent
Correspo
nding
Letter
Grade
B-
2.75
C+
2.5
2.0
C-
1.75
1.0
1.0
FX
[0,29]
Pass
Unsatisfactor
y
Unsatisfactor
y
40
Fail
= 1.0
Fail
[30,39]
Satisfactory
Second
Class
Good
First class
with
Distinctio
n
3.0
First
class
Interval
of
Number
Grade
=4
Correspo
nding
fixed
Number
Grade
Raw
Mark
Interval(100%)
[95,100]
Stat us
Descripti
on
Grading System and ECTS Grade Transfer
September 2012
Graduation Requirements
Students must take and pass all the required courses to satisfy the requirements for
graduation. The total number of credit points required for graduation with the Degree
of Bachelor of Science in all the five focus areas of Electrical and Computer
Engineering is 300 ECTS (158credit hours), including the 30 ECTS mandatory
internship (industry placement). Besides the total credit hour required for graduation
students
(a) overall cumulative grade point average (CGPA),
(b) CGPA for the core electrical engineering courses, and
(c) CGPA for focus area courses
Must each be at least 2.0 for successful completion and no F grade.
Degree Nomenclature
After successful completion of all the requirements, a student graduating from the
Electrical and Computer Engineering department in one of the respective focus areas
will be entitled to earn a degree in:
Electrical Engineering (Electronic Communications), Degree of Bachelor of

Science
Electrical Engineering (Electrical Power), Degree of Bachelor of Science
Electrical Engineering (Computer), Degree of Bachelor of Science

Electrical Engineering (Industrial Control), Degree of Bachelor of Science
Electrical Engineering (Microelectronics), Degree of Bachelor of Science
41
September 2012
Appendix
Bachelor of Science Modules and Course Handbook
First Group Common Modules and Courses
Module Characterization Form
Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
01
Pre-engineering
The Pre-engineering module familiarizes the students with the basics of
engineering and introduces them with the various disciplines in the area.
It teaches them the ethics of engineering, develops their knowledge in
documenting experiments, research and also presentation skills.
The students will be able to distinguish engineering disciplines and
ethics. They will gain basic knowledge of engineering mechanics and
engineering economy.
During the courses of this module the students will learn:
interrelations and distinction among engineering, science and
technology - R&D in engineering;
technical professional levels, qualifications and duties &
responsibilities of technicians, technologists and engineers
(carrier structures and levels);
engineering disciplines - civil, mechanical, chemical, industrial,
manufacturing, electrical, computer, biomedical, aeronautic and
space;
engineering professional ethics and moral issues - engineering for
civil and military applications;
basic engineering drawing skills;
introduction to mechanics and its application
introduce themselves with engineering economy
develop reasoning skill
Total ECTS of the 21

module
Time allocated
Lecture
21*27=567
176
Course Number
CEng-1011
Tutorial
Lab/prac
96
48
Courses of the Module
Course Name
Engineering Mechanics I
42
Home study
375
ECTS
5

GEng-1012
MEng-1014
ECEG-1013
Econ-1015

Technical Drawing
Communicative English
43
September 2012
3
6
3
4
September 2012

Wolaita Sodo University, College of Engineering
Course Title: Engineering Mechanics I
Pre-requisites:
(Statics): (2:3:0)
Math-2023: Applied Mathematics III (corequisite)
Course Number: CEng-1011
Course status: Compulsory
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: I
Module: Pre-engineering
Module Coordinator: TBA
Contact Hours(per week): 6
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives & Competences
to be Acquired
Course Description/Course
Contents
Teaching & Learning Methods

Assessment/Evaluation method
Attendance Requirements
After completing this course, students shall be able to

differentiate between scalar and vector quantities
analyze trusses and simple frames
determine the rectangular components of a force
determine the resultant of a group of forces and
couple
draw free body diagrams of a plane structure or any
part thereof
state and apply the conditions of equilibrium
determine resultant of distributed forces, locate
centroid of plane figures
resolve forces in any two directions
Resultants of coplanar and non - coplanar force
systems.
Equations of equilibrium for coplanar and non coplanar force systems.
Equilibrium of simple structures: trusses, beams,
frames and machines.
Axial force, shear force and bending moment
diagrams for beams and simple frames.
Properties of surfaces - centroid, moment and
product of inertia of bodies and areas.
Static friction.
Lecture supported by class work and assignment.
Attendance (5%); Assignment (20%), Chapter Quizzes
(15%); Tests (20%); Final Examination (40%)
75% lecture attendance
Textbook:
References:
Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G., Engineering
mechanics.
Hibbler R.C., Engineering Mechanics.
Beer, P. Mechanics for engineers.
Best, C.L., Analytical mechanics for engineers
44
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Engineering
Pre-requisites: None
Skill : 2 (1,0,3)
Course Number: GEng-1012
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: I
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Assessment/Evaluation
Literature
To enable students understand the constructive

interrelation of natural & social sciences as well as
business and art to engineering and their positive
impact on the socioeconomic aspect of a society.
Interrelations and distinction among engineering,
science and technology - R&D in engineering;
Technical professional levels, qualifications and
duties & responsibilities of technicians, technologists
and engineers (carrier structures and levels);
Engineers in academics and in industrial professions
- B.Sc. and B.Eng., M.Sc. and M.Eng.
Engineering disciplines - civil, mechanical,
chemical, industrial, manufacturing, electrical,
computer, biomedical, aeronautic and space;
Specific roles of electrical engineers in the
engineering profession;
Engineering professional ethics and moral issues engineering for civil and military applications;
Normative interaction of engineers with other
professionals as well as art and business;
Engineers as leaders and managers;
Engineering professional associations
Lecture and laboratory exercises.
75% lecture attendance and 100% lab attendance
Textbook:
Engineering Fundamentals and Problem Solving,
4th Edition, Eide, Jenison, Mashaw, Northrop,
McGraw-Hill
References:
Engineering in History, Richard Shelton Kirby,
et al, Dover, 1990.
Beyond Engineering: How Society Shapes
Technology, Robert Pool, Oxford University
Press, 1997.
Engineering: An Introduction to a Creative
Profession: Fifth Edition, Beakley, Evans, Keats,
Macmillan Publishing Company, 1986.
45
September 2012

Course Title: Technical Drawing : 3 (2,3,0)
Course Number: MEng-1031
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: I
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
At the end of the course, students shall master:

Different types of projection techniques.
Sketching multi-view drawings.
Pictorial drawings of given multi-view drawings.
Sketching auxiliary and sectional views.
Finding intersection lines of different geometries
& development of surfaces.
Theory of projections.
Multi-view drawings.
Pictorial drawings.
Auxiliary views.
Sectional views.
Intersection and development.
Lecture and Drawing exercises.
Attendance (5%); Assignment (35%), Tests (20%);
Final Examination (40%)
Textbook:
..
References:
..
46
September 2012

Course Title: Communicative English : 3
(3,0,0)
Course Number: Flen-1013
ECTS Credit: 4
Semester: I
Module: pre-engineering
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives
Contents

Literature
Present oral reports

Write short reports
Read various materials and make their own
notes
The curse will include a variety of videos, oral
presentations, listening exercises, discussions and
pronunciation practices with peer and teacher
feedback.
Furthermore, it will treat the general characteristics
of academic writing, and encourage students to
explore the grammar and style of academic writing.
Hence, instruction and practice in writing academic
texts will be provided.
In additions, the course will explore strategies of
improving reading skills to help students become
active readers. In connection to this, the course will
provide various vocabulary learning strategies to help
learners improve their vocabulary stock.
75% lecture
- Adrian Doff, Teach English: A training course
for teachers, 1988 CUP
- Betty Schrampfer Azar Fundamentals of
English Grammar, 1992 Prentice Hall
- Johns P. Functional English, 1984
47
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Economics: 3
(3,0,0)
Course Number: Econ-1015
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: I
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
After completing this course, students shall be able to

define basic economics principles using equations
and graphs
solve fundamental economic problems
state the flow of economic activities and make
decisions
know the relationship of supply and demand
analyze economic policy instruments
determine the basis of national income accounting
describe GDP and GNP
state the theory of production and cost
The course covers basic topics in both microeconomics
and macroeconomics. The microeconomics part of the
course is designed to introduce fundamental economic
concepts such as security, opportunity cost, the laws of
demand and supply and elasticity. In addition, the
functioning of a competitive market and the essence of
short-run production theory and profit maximization
are covered in this part of the course. Topics related to
the concept, measurement and problems of economywide
performance
are
treated
under
the
macroeconomic part of the course. The objective of the
course is for students to grasp the principles of
economics.
Textbook:
References:
Cambell R. Mcconnel, Economics: principles,
problems and policies
David N. Hyman , Economics;
Ayele K., Introductory Economics;
W.J.Boumol and A.S. Blinder , Economics:
Principles and policy;
Paul A Samuelson and William D. Nordhaus ,
Economics;
48
September 2012

Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
02
Applied Mathematics
Module Applied Mathematics provides the Electrical and Computer
Engineering student with the basic familiarity of the mathematical tools
that will be central to understanding engineering. The module imparts the
ability to derive empirical as well as analytical results from their
observations and form some sort of mathematical models which are the
primary tool of representation in engineering. The student will have
enough experience with matrices, derivatives, integration, Fourier series,
calculus of multivariable functions.
understand the principles of vector and scalars, definition and
operation of matrices & determinants;
understand basics of limit and continuity, basic rules of derivatives
& their applications, integrals, integration techniques and their
application in volume, arc length, and surface area determination;
understand the principles of sequence and series, definition and
operation of power series, principles of Fourier series;
understand calculus of differential equations, and integral calculus
of functions of several variables
advanced mathematics for Scientists and Engineers
Fundamental computational methods to solve scientific and
engineering problem.
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
25*27=675
Course Number
Math-1021
Math-1022
ECEG-2023
ECEG-2024
25
Lecture
224
tutorial
Lab/prac
112
32
Course Name
49
Home study
342
ECTS
6
6
7
6
September 2012

Course Title: Applied Mathematics I : 4
Pre-requisites: -(4,2,0)
Course Number: Math-1041
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: I
Module: Applied Mathematics
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Assessment/Evaluation & Grading
System
Literature
At the end of this course, students will:

understand the principles of vector and scalars
definition and operation of matrices &
determinants,
know the basics of limit and continuity,
Understand basic rules of derivatives & their
applications, integrals, integration techniques
and their application in volume, arc length, and
surface area determination.
Vectors and vector spaces
Matrices and determinants
Limit and continuity
Derivatives and application of derivatives
Integration
Application of Integrals
Lectures, class works, assignments and Tutorials
Textbook:
References:
R. Ellis: Calculus with Analytic Geometry
S.Lang: Linear Algebra
Demissu Gemeda: An Introduction to Linear
ALGEBRA
E.W. Swokowski: Calculus
J. Stewart, Calculus
50
September 2012

Course Title: Applied Mathematics II : 4
Pre-requisites: Math-1021
(4,2,0)
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: II
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

System
Literature
Upon completion of this course, students will

understand the principles of sequence and
series,
Know the definition and operation of power
series, principles of Fourier series, calculus of
differential equations, and integral calculus of
functions of several variables.
Sequence and Series
Power Series
Fourier Series
Differential Calculus of Functions of Several
Variables
Integral Calculus of Functions of Several Variables
Textbook:
References:
Robert Ellis and Denny Gulick: Calculus with
Analytic Geometry
Johnson and Kiokemeister: Calculus with Analytic
Geometry
Erwin Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering
Mathematics
51
September 2012

Course Title: Applied Mathematics III : 4
Pre-requisites: Math-1022: Applied
(4,2,0)
Mathematics II
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: III
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

System
Literature
The objective of the course is to equip students with

the mathematical tools of developing mathematical
models of physical engineering problems.
Vector-valued functions of one variable
Space motion
Scalar functions of several variables
Partial differentiation
Analytic functions
Power and Laurents series
Fourier series and other orthogonal functions
Vector calculus: vector differential operations,
gradient, divergence, curl, line integral, Greens and
Stokes theorem
Residue theorem and evaluation of simple integral
Cauchy integral theorem and formula
Additional topics such as vector fields, and linear
algebra.
Textbook:
References:
Rogers, H. Multivariable Calculus with Vectors.
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall
52
September 2012

Course Title: Computational Methods : 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,1,2)
ECEG-2101: Introduction to Computing
Course Number: ECEG-2024
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: IV
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives
Contents
The course aims to acquaint students to the

fundamental computational methods to solve
scientific and engineering problem.
Number System and Numerical Error Analysis
The Error Problem; Representation of Integers and
Fractions; Number Representation and Storage in
Computers; Rounding Off Problem; Numerical
Errors; Significant Digits; Numerical Cancellation;
Algorithm for Conversion from one base to
another; Computational Problems and Algorithms;
Computational Efficiency; Computational Methods
for Error Estimation
Solution of Nonlinear Equations
Methods used in Root Finding; Summary of the
Solutions of Nonlinear Equations; Fixed Point
Iteration; Real Roots of Polynomial Equations;
Iterative Methods for Finding Real Zeros of a
Polynomial; Order of Convergence
Review Matrices
Elementary Properties of Matrices; Orthogonality
and Orthonormality of Vectors and Matrices; Norm
of Vectors and Matrices
System of Linear Equations
Existence and Uniqueness of Solutions; Methods of
Solution of Linear Equations
Solution of Systems of Nonlinear Equations
The Iterative Method; The Newton-Raphson
Method
Interpolation and Approximation
Class of Common Approximation Functions;
Criteria for the Choice of the Approximate
Function; Finite Differences; Divided Differences;
Interpolation by Polynomials; Least Square
Approximation by Polynomials; Piecewise
Polynomial Approximation; Cubic Spline
Interpolation
Numerical Differentiation and Integration
Numerical Differentiation; Numerical Integration
Numerical Solutions of Differential Equations
Ordinary Differential Equations; Partial Differential
Equations
53
Course outline
54
September 2012
September 2012
CHAPTER 1
Number System and Numerical
Error Analysis
1.1Significant Figures
1.2Accuracy and Precision
1.3 Error Definitions
1.4 Round Off Errors
1.5 Truncation Errors
1.6 Total Numerical Error
1.7 Representation of Integers
and Fractions
1.8 Number Representation and
Storage in Computers
CHAPTER 2
Roots of Equations
2.1 Bracketing Methods
Graphical Method
Bisection Method
False position
Method
2.2 Open Methods
Simple Fixed
point Iteration
Newton-Raphson
Method
Secant Method
2.3 Multiple Roots
2.4 Systems of Nonlinear
Equation
2.5 Roots of Polynomials
Convectional
Method
Mullers Method
To introduce different types of error,

Significant figures and number
representation &Storage in Computers.
CHAPTER 3
Linear Algebraic Equations
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Gauss Elimination Method
3.3 Gauss Jordan Method
3.5 Lu Decomposition
3.6 Gauss-Seidel method
Apply the methods used to solve

simultaneous
equations
(Gauss
Elimination,
Gauss
Jordan,
Lu
Decomposition
and
Gauss-Seidel
method).
CHAPTER 4
Optimization
4.1 One Dimensional
Unconstrained optimization
Golden Section
Search
Quadratic
Interpolation
To apply different root finding methods

like Bracketing methods (Graphical,
Bisection, False-position )and open
methods(Simple Fixed point Iteration,
NewtonRaphson method & Secant
methods)
Develop a program that will solve

algebraic equations using the above
methods.
Understand the techniques to find the
minimum or maximum of a function of a
single variable and optimizing in the
presence of constraints such as limited
resource.
55
September 2012
Newtons Method
4.2 constrained optimization
Linear Programming
the Simplex Method
CHAPTER 5
Curve Fitting
5.1 Least Square regression
Linear regression
Polynomial regression
Multiple regression
5.2 Interpolation
Newtons Divided
Difference interpolating
polynomial
Lagrange interpolating
polynomial
To know about curve fitting using Least

Square regression and Interpolation
methods.
CHAPTER 6
To Apply the Trapezoidal and
Numerical Differentiation and
Simpsons Rules for Numerical
Integration
Integration.
6.1 Newton Cotes Integration
formulas
The Trapezoidal Rule
Simpsons Rules
To
apply
High
Accuracy
Integration with
Differentiation
formulas
and
Unequal Segments
Richardson
Extrapolation
for
6.2 Numerical Differentiation
Numerical Differentiation.
High Accuracy
Differentiation formulas
Richardson
Extrapolation
CHAPTER 7
Numerical
Solutions
of
Differential Equations
To enable students to find Numerical
7.1 Ordinary Differential
Solutions of Differential Equations using
Equations
Eulers and Runge-Kutta Method
Eulers Method
Runge-Kutta Methods
7.2 Partial Differential
Equations
7.2.1Finite Difference:
Elliptic Equations
The Laplace Equations
Solution Techniques
Boundary Conditions
7.2.2Finite Difference:
Parabolic Equations
56
September 2012
Explicit Methods
A Simple Implicit
Method
The Crank-Nicolson
Method
7.2.3 Finite Element method
One -Dimensional
Problem
Two - Dimensional
Problem

Literature
Lecture supported by tutorial, programming exercises and

assignments
Textbook:
Steven C.Chapra, Numerical Methods for Engineers
References:
Ralston A. and P. Rabinowitz: A First Course in
Numerical Analysis, 2nd ed, McGraw Hill, New York,
1987
Conte S.D. and Carl de Boor: Elementary Numerical
Analysis An Algorithm Approach, 3rd ed, McGraw Hill
Int. Student ed, 1981
Jain M.K., S.R.K. Iyenger and R.K. Jain: Numerical
Methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation, 2nd
ed, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1985
57
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
03
Humanities and Language
Module Humanities and Language enables students gain competence
on the field of communication skills, reasoning, morale and economics.
The module focuses on the necessary knowledge to be acquired for a
better understanding of engineering communities and the general public
as well.
The student will be able to communicate in both reading and writing
with an academic level, to clearly define and present an argument, to
enhance their knowledge on the constitution, proper morale and ethical
virtues of the community and to understand the economic problems and
their corresponding solutions.
Upon the completion of the courses of this module students will be able
to:
Total ECTS of the
understand and use different skills and strategies to read

read different materials for a variety of purposes
write clearly and effectively
communicate ideas clearly and effectively
differentiate between induction, analogy, legal and moral
reasoning
state the purpose of definition and definitional techniques
state what propositional logic is and the corresponding rules
identify the different types and natures of arguments
understand the essence and origins of the state and Government
grasp the concept of citizens and citizenship
understand the ideas of Morality, Ethics and Civic virtues
define basic economics principles using equations and graphs
solve fundamental economic problems
identify economic policy instruments
13
58

module
Time allocation
13*27=351
Course Number
Flen-1034
Phil-1032
GeEd-1031
ECEG-1033
Lecture
144
tutorial
Lab/prac
48
0
Course Name
Sophomore English(writing skill)
Logic
Civic and ethical Education
September 2012
Home study
159
ECTS
4
3
3
3

Course Title: Sophomore English : 3 (3,0,0) Pre-requisites: None
Course Number: Flen-1034
ECTS Credit: 4
Semester: II
Module: Humanities and Language
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
After completing this course, students will:

understand and use different skills and strategies to
read
understand the meaning of what is read
read different materials for a variety of purposes
write clearly and effectively
understand and use the steps of the writing process
analyze and evaluate the effectiveness of written
work
analyze and evaluate the effectiveness of formal
and informal communication
communicate ideas clearly and effectively
The course prepares the inexperienced writer for
college level reading and academic writing by
focusing on critical thinking, reading, writing, and
study skills necessary to succeed at the academic
level
75% lecture and 75% tutorial attendance
Textbook:
References:
Baker, Barbara and Catherine Baker , Writing with
Contemporary Readings
Lester, Lanny, and Judith Resnick , Text &
59
September 2012
Thought: An Integrated Approach to College

Reading and Writing
McDonald, Stephen, and William Salomone, The
Writers Response: A Reading-Based Approach to
College Writing

Course Title: Logic : 3 (3,0,0)
Course Number: Phil-1032
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: I
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
After completing this course, students shall be able to:

differentiate between induction, analogy, legal and
moral reasoning
state the purpose of definition and definitional
techniques
state what propositional logic is and the
corresponding rules
define syllogistic logic and list methods of testing
validity
list down the types of fallacies
identify the different types and natures of
arguments
This course attempts to introduce the fundamental
concepts of logic and methods of logical reasoning.
The purpose of the course is to develop in learners the
skills required to construct sound arguments of their
own and the ability to critically evaluate the arguments
of others; cultivate the habits of critical thinking and
develop sensitivity to the clear and accurate use of
language.
75% lecture and 75% tutorial attendance
Textbook:
References:
Huriey, Patric J, A Concise Introduction to Logic
Copi, Irving M. and Carl Cohen, Introduction to
60
September 2012
Logic
Simico, N.D. and G.G. James, Elementary Logic
Guttenplan, Samue, The Language of Logic
Stephen C, The power of Logic
Fogelin, Robert. J. Understanding Arguments: An
Introduction to Informal Logic

Course Title: Civic and ethical Education :
3 (3,0,0)
Course Number: GeEd-1031
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: II
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
At the end of this course students will:

Know the essence and origins of the state and
Government
Understand the concept of citizens and citizenship
Know origins, essence and forms of constitution
Know and apply ideas of Morality, Ethics and
Civic virtues
This course attempts to introduce the fundamental
concepts of
State, Government and Citizenship
Learning about Constitutions
Constitutional experience in Ethiopia
Morality, Ethics and Civic virtues
Textbook:
References:
Touraine, Alain, What Is Democracy?
Fierlbeck, Katherine, Globalizing Democracy:
Power, Legitimacy, and the Interpretation of
Democratic Ideas.
61
September 2012

Course Title: Technical Report Writing : 1
(0,3,0)
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: II
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
To teach writing skills appropriate for technical

reports.
Technical writing
Necessity, types and levels of technical writings;
formats, contents, grammatical, punctuation and
idiomatic techniques; technical reports and
proposals, formats and contents.
Report presentation skills
Listening, reading, composition and oration;
knowledge of key vocabularies in engineering and
science; oral presentations formats; applications of
audiovisual equipment; coordination of
presentation/discussion forums.
Tutorial on Report Writing
75% lecture/Tutorial attendance
Textbook:
References:
Baker, Barbara and Catherine Baker, Writing with
Contemporary Readings
Lester, Lanny, and Judith Resnick , Text &
Thought: An Integrated Approach to College
Reading and Writing
McDonald, Stephen, and William Salomone, The
Writers Response: A Reading-Based Approach to
College Writing
62
September 2012

Wolaita University
Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
04
Engineering Mechanics II and Thermodynamics
Module Engineering Mechanics II and Thermodynamics enables students
gain basic knowledge in dynamic engineering mechanics and also
thermodynamics principles.
During the courses of this module the students will know:
scalar and vector quantities,

trusses and simple frames analysis,
rectangular components and resultant of a force,
free body diagrams of a plane structure or any part thereof,
conditions of equilibrium,
distributed forces and centroid of plane figures
principles governing motion of objects,
appropriate physical models representing physical systems,
appropriate coordinate system & analysis of motion variables,
Deriving equation of motion relating forces acting and resulting
motion.
thermodynamics principles
module
Time allocation
Lecture
10*27=270
64
Course Number
MEng-1041
MEng-2042
Tutorial
Lab/prac
96
0
Course Name
Engineering Mechanics II (Dynamics)
63
Home study
160
ECTS
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Engineering Mechanics II
Pre-requisites:
(Dynamics): (2,3,0)
CEng-1011: Engineering Mechanics (Statics)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: II
Module: Engineering Mechanics II &
Thermodynamics
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
Students shall understand basic principles governing

motion of objects, appropriate physical models
representing physical systems, appropriate coordinate
system & analysis of motion variables, and deriving
equation of motion relating forces acting and resulting
motion.
Introduction basic concepts and equations motion.
Kinematics of particles.
Kinetics of particles.
Kinematics of rigid bodies.
Kinetics of rigid bodies.
Textbook:
References:
Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G., Engineering
Mechanics.
Hibbler R.C., Engineering Mechanics.
Beer, P. Mechanics for engineers.
Best, C.L., Analytical mechanics for engineers
64
September 2012

Course Title: Engineering Thermodynamics: Pre-requisites:
(2,3,0)
MEng-1041: Engineering Mechanics II
(Dynamics)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: III
Module: Engineering Mechanics II &
Thermodynamics
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
The course enables students to:

understand the relationship between internal energy,
heat and work as expressed by the First Law of
Thermodynamics;
apply the conservation of energy to thermodynamic
systems
state and explain the Second Law of Thermodynamics
explain how the Carnot cycle applies to heat engines
and refrigeration cycles
explain the concept of entropy
apply the concept of availability, irreversibility and
the second law in defining the efficiency of a system
Course Description/Course Contents Thermodynamic notions and systems
Fundamental concepts
Pure substances
Vapor pressure curves
Steam tables
Phase diagrams of steam
First law of Thermodynamics: closed and open
systems, enthalpy, Carnot cycle
Second law of Thermodynamics: Reversible and
irreversible processes
Consequences of the Second Law of Thermodynamics
and Entropy
Availability and Irreversibility
65

Literature
September 2012

SonntagR.E.,Fundamentalsof Thermodynamics,
McGraw-Hill, 1999.
Michael J. Moran, H.N. Shapiro, Fundamentals
of Engineering Thermodynamics, John Wiley
and Sons. Inc., 2007.
Cengel Y A., Bole M A., Thermodynamics An
Engineering Approach, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
Eastop T.D and McConkey A., Applied
Thermodynamics

Wolaita sodo University
Module Number
05
Applied Physics and electric material
Rationale and
The Module equips the students with sound knowledge in modern physics
objective of the
theories, electromagnetic field equations and properties, materials
module
characteristics and technologies for manufacturing electrical and electronics
devices.
The courses of this module will help the students to:
Acquaint the necessary background for understanding of one of the
modern sciences dealing with the special theory of relativity and
quantum mechanics.
Understand and quantify the electrical effects of static charge
distributions in vacuum and material body.
Apply the laws governing electrostatic to different charge
distributions.
Understand and quantify the effects of charges moving with uniform
velocity.
Summarize electromagnetism through Maxwells equations.
Review fundamentals of atomic theory; elementary quantum
mechanics the role of electrons in determining the macroscopic
electrical behavior of engineering materials.
Know the physical properties of conductors, superconductors,
semiconductor, dielectric and magnetic materials.
Develop quantitative descriptions of the physical properties.
Understand application and manufacturing processes of electrical
and electronic materials.
module
Time allocation
Lecture
15*27=405
96
Course Number
ECEG-2051
Tutorial
Lab/prac
144
0
Course Name
66
Home study
165
ECTS
5

ECEG-2052
ECEG-3053
Electrical Materials and Technology
September 2012
5
5

Course Title: Applied Modern Physics : 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,3,0)
Math-2023: Applied Mathematics III (corequisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: III
Module: Applied Physics and electric
material
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives
Contents

System
Literature
To provide the necessary background for

understanding of one of the modern sciences dealing
with the special theory of relativity and quantum
mechanics.
The course contains:Comparison of Classical and
Modern Physics; The Special Theory of Relativity;
Electron Emission; The Dual Properties of Particles;
Introduction to Quantum Mechanics; Introduction to
Solid State Physics;
Introduction
The Special Theory of Relativity
The Particle Properties of Waves
The Wave Properties of Particles
Structure of the Atom
The Bohr Model of the Atom
Quantum Mechanics
The Quantum Theory of Hydrogen Atom
Electron Spin and Complex Atoms
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignments and
quizes
Attendance (5%); Assignment (20%), Chapter
Quizzes (15%); Tests (20%); Final Examination
(40%)
Textbook:
J. W. Rohlf , Modern Physics: from alpha to
Z (John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York)
67
September 2012
References:
Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc.
T. Thoronton, A. Rex, Modern physics for
Scientists and Engineers
Ronald Gautreau, William Savin, Modern
Physics (Schaum's Outline Series)
(McGraw-Hill, New York)
P.A. Tipler, R.A. Liewellyn, Modern
Physics, W.H. Freeman and Company

Course Title: Electromagnetic Fields : 3
Pre-requisites: ECEG-1061: Fundamental of
(2,3,0)
Electrical Engineering
Math-2023: Applied Mathematic III (corequisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IV
Module: Applied Physics and electric
Module Coordinator: TBA N.N.
materials
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Upon completing this course, students will be able to:

Understand and quantify the electrical effects of
static charge distributions in vacuum and material
body.
Apply the laws governing electrostatic to different
charge distributions.
Understand and quantify the effects of charges
moving with uniform velocity.
Understand the elements of electrodynamics.
Summarize electromagnetism through Maxwells
equations.
Review of Vectors
Scalar & Vector Fields; Line, Surface, & Volume
Integrals; Gradient of a Scalar field, Divergence &
Curl of a Vector Field, the Divergence & Stokes's
Theorems, Laplacian of a Scalar Field; Solenoidal
& Irrotational Vector Fields, Helmholz's Theorem;
Orthogonal Curvilinear Coordinates.
Electrostatic Fields
Coulomb's Law, Electric Field E, Electric Flux
Density D; Gauss's Law; Electric Potential V;
Relationship between E &V; Electric Dipole;
Energy in Electrostatic Fields.
Electric Fields in Material Body
Convection & Conduction Currents; Polarization in
Dielectrics; Boundary Conditions.
Electrostatic Boundary-Value Problems
Poisson's & Laplace's Equations; Resistance &
68
September 2012
Capacitance.
Magnetostatics Fields
Biot-Savart Law; Amperes Circuital Law;
Magnetic Flux Density B; Magnetic Vector
Potential A; Maxwell's Equation for Static EM
Fields.
Magnetic Forces & Materials
Forces due to Magnetic Fields; Magnetic Boundary
Conditions; Magnetic Energy; Faraday's Law.
Magnetic Forces & Materials
Introduction to Time Varying EM Fields.
Course Outline
Time Allotted
1 weeks
2 weeks
2 weeks
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Vector Algebra
1.1 Introduction
1.2Scalars and Vectors
1.3 Unit Vectors
1.4 Vector Addition and Subtraction
1.5 Position and Distance Vectors
1.6 Vector Multiplication
1.7 Components of a Vector
CHAPTER 2
Coordinate Systems and
Transformation
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Cartesian Coordinates(x,y,z)
2.3 Circular Cylindrical Coordinates
2.4 Spherical Coordinates
2.5 Constant-Coordinate Surface
CHAPTER 3
Vector Calculus
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Differential Length, Area ,and
Volume
3.3 Line ,Surface ,and Volume
Integral 3.4 Del Operator
3.5 Gradient of a Scalar
3.6 Divergence of a Vector and
Divergence Theorem
3.7 Curl of a Vector and Stokes
Theorem
3.8 Laplacian of a Scalar
3.9 Classification of Vector Fields
69
Chapter Objective
To introduce students about
basic Concepts of Vector
Algebra
The Students should able to
evaluate
vector
addition,
subtraction and multiplication
To
introduce
the
Coordinate Systems
four
Enable students to transform

from one coordinate system to
other Coordinate System.
The students will be able to find

different vector Calculus like
evaluating Gradient of a Scalar,
Divergence of a Vector, Curl of
a Vector, and Laplacian of a
Scalar

2 weeks
1 weeks
1 weeks
2 weeks
CHAPTER 4
Electrostatic fields
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Columbs Law and Field
Intensity
4.3 Electric Fields due to
Continuous Charge
Distributions
4.4 Electric Flux Density
4.5 Gausss Law Maxwells
Equation
4.6 Application of Maxwells Law
4.7 Electric Potential
4.8 Relationship b/n E and V Maxwells Equation
4.9 An Electric Dipole and Flux
Lines
4.10 Energy Density in
Electrostatic Fields
CHAPTER 5
Electric Fields in Material Space
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Properties of Materials
5.3 Convection and Conduction
Currents 5.4 Conductors
5.5 Polarization in Dielectrics
5.6 Dielectrics constant and
Strength
5.7 Linear ,Isotropic , and
Homogeneous Dielectrics
5.8 Boundary Condition
CHAPTER 6
Electrostatic Boundary Value
Problems
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Poisson's & Laplace's Equations
6.3 General Procedure for Solving
Poisson's or Laplace's Equations
6.4 Resistance & Capacitance.
CHAPTER 7
Magneto static Fields
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Biot-Savart Law
7.3 Amperes Circuital LawMaxwells
Equation
7.4 Applications of Amperes Law
7.5 Maxwells Equations for
Static EM Fields
70
September 2012
Apply the laws governing
electrostatic to different charge
distributions.
To introduce the Students about

electric properties of materials
like Dielectrics constant and
Boundary Condition.
To Apply Poisson's & Laplace's

Equations on the Electrostatic
Boundary Value Problems.
To Apply Biot-Savart Law,

Amperes Circuital Law and
Maxwells
Equation for Static EM
Fields.
September 2012
7.6 Magnetic Scalar and Vector

Potential s
7.7 Derivation of Biot-Savart Law
and Amperes Law
2 week
2 weeks
CHAPTER 8
Magnetic Forces , Materials , and
Devices
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Forces due to Magnetic Fields
8.3 Magnetic Torque and Moment
8.4 A Magnetic Dipole
8.5 Magnetization in Materials
8.6 Classification of Magnetic
Materials
8.7 Magnetic Boundary Conditions
8.8 Inductors and Inductances
8.9 Magnetic Energy
8.10 Magnetic circuits
8.11 Force on Magnetic Materials
CHAPTER 9
Maxwells Equations
9.1 Introduction
9.2 Faradays Law
9.3 Transformer and Motional
EMFs
9.4 Displacement Current
9.5 Maxwells Equations in final
forms
9.6 Time-Varying Potentials
9.7 Time-Harmonic Fields
Literature

Magnetic properties of
materials, Magnetic Torque and
Moment, Classification of
Magnetic Materials and
Magnetic Boundary Conditions.
To apply the Maxwells

Equations
Lecture supported by tutorial,

assignments, Demonstrations
Attendance (5%); Assignment
(20%), Chapter Quizzes (15%);
Tests (20%); Final Examination
(40%)
Textbook:
Matthew N. O. Sadiku,
Elements of
Electromagnetics, Oxford
University Press, New
York, 2001
References:
Hayt, W.H., Engineering
Electromagnetics, 4th ed.,
McGraw-Hill, 1981.
71
September 2012
David J. Griffiths,
Introduction to
Electrodynamics, 3rd ed.,
Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1999

Course Title: Electrical Materials and
Pre-requisites:
Technology : 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-2072: Applied Electronics II
ECEG-2051: Applied Modern Physics
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: V
Module: Applied Physics and Electrical
material
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Competences to be Acquired
Contents
After completing this course, students will be able:

To review fundamentals of atomic theory; elementary
quantum mechanics the role of electrons in determining
the macroscopic electrical behavior of engineering
materials.
To understand the physical properties of conductors,
superconductors, semiconductor, dielectric and magnetic
materials.
To develop quantitative descriptions of the physical
properties.
To understand application and manufacturing processes
of electrical and electronic materials
Review of atomic theory of matter
The Rutherford model of atom, The Bohr atom model,
Quantization of electron energy, Schroedinger equation,
Atomic bonding, Energy band diagram.
Conducting materials
Conduction in conductor materials, Equation of motion
of an electron, Drudel model, Fermi-Dirac distribution
function and the Fermi energy of metals, Influence of
frequency on conductivity, Factors influencing
resistively of conductor materials, Thermal
conductivity of conductors, Classification and
applications.
Superconductivity
BSC theory of superconductivity, Meissner effect,
Classification of superconductor materials, London
equation, Application of superconductor.
Semi-conducting materials
72
September 2012
Energy band diagrams, Intrinsic semiconductors,

Extrinsic semiconductors, Fermi-Dirac distribution and
the concentration of charge carriers, Drift and diffusion
current, P-N Junction, Hall-Effect, Manufacturing
process of semiconductors.
Dielectric Materials
Field Relations, Polarization and mechanisms of
polarization in dielectrics, Lorentz field, Properties of
dielectric materials, Complex permittivity, Influence of
frequency on permittivity, Mechanisms of electrical
breakdown of dielectric materials, Ferro electricity,
Classification and applications.
Magnetic materials
Macroscopic characterization of magnetic materials,
Magnetic dipole moment, Types of magnetism,
Spontaneous magnetization and the Curie Weiss law,
Domain movement in
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Review of atomic theory of matter
1.1 The Rutherford model of atom
1.2 The Bohr atom model
1.3 Quantization of electron
energy
1.4 Schroedinger equation
1.5 Atomic bonding
1.6 Energy band diagram
Chapter Objective
CHAPTER 2
Conducting materials
2.1 Conduction in conductor
materials
2.2 Equation of motion of an

electron
2.3 Drudel model

2.4 Fermi-Dirac distribution
function and the Fermi energy
of metals
2.5 Influence of frequency on

conductivity
2.6 Factors influencing resistively
of conductor materials
2.7 Thermal conductivity of
conductors
2.8 Classification and applications.
Time Allotted
2 weeks
To review fundamentals of
atomic theory elementary
quantum mechanics and the
role
of
electrons
in
determining the macroscopic
electrical
behavior
of
engineering materials.
2 weeks
To understand the physical

properties of conductors.
To understand motion of
electron, Drudel model, FermiDirac distribution function and
the Fermi energy of metals.
To explore the Factors that
may influence resistivity of
conducting materials
CHAPTER 3
Superconductivity
3.1 BSC theory of
3 weeks
73

superconductivity
3.2 Meissner effect
3.3 Classification of
superconductor materials
3.4 London equation
3.5 Application of superconductor
3.6 Semi-conducting materials
CHAPTER 4
Semi-conducting materials
4.1 Energy band diagrams
4.2 Intrinsic semiconductors
4.3 Extrinsic semiconductors
4.4 Fermi-Dirac distribution and
the concentration of charge
carriers
4.5 Drift and diffusion current
4.6 P-N Junction
4.7 Hall-Effect
4.8 Manufacturing process of
semiconductors.
CHAPTER 5
Dielectric Materials
5.1 Field Relations
5.2 Polarization
5.3 Lorentz field
5.4 Properties of dielectric
materials
5.5 Complex permittivity
5.6 Influence of frequency on
permittivity
5.7 Mechanisms of electrical
breakdown of dielectric
materials
5.8 Ferro electricity
5.9 piezoelectricity
CHAPTER 6
Magnetic materials
6.1 Macroscopic characterization
of magnetic materials
6.2 Magnetic dipole moment
6.3 Types of magnetism
6.4 Spontaneous magnetization
and the Curie Weiss law
September 2012

properties of superconductor.
To apply superconductors on
some application.
3 weeks

properties of Semi-conducting
materials.
To understand the electrical
properties of Semi-conducting
materials.
To understand application and
manufacturing processes of
semiconductors.
3 weeks
To understand the properties of

dielectric materials.
To explore Mechanisms of
electrical breakdown of
dielectric materials
To understand Ferro electricity
and piezoelectricity.
To understand macroscopic
characterization of magnetic
materials.
To understand Magnetic dipole
moment.
To explore the different types
of magnetization.
2 weeks
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment and

laboratory exercises.
74
September 2012

Quizzes (15%); Tests (20%); Final
Examination (40%)
75% lecture attendance and 100% lab

attendance
Textbook:
Allison: Electrical engineering materials
References:
Dekker: Electrical engineering materials
and devices
Solymar: Lectures on the electrical
properties of materials
Lovell, Avery, Vernon: Physical
properties of materials
Pasco: Properties of materials for
electrical engineers
Stern: Fundamentals of integrated circuits
Literature
75
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
06
Basics of Electrical Engineering
Module Electrical Engineering I enables students to understand the basic
electrical engineering concepts and practices .The module serves as an
introductory to other advanced courses.
understand the basic electromagnetic phenomena ,circuit variables
and parameters
apply the fundamental and derived circuit laws and theorems to
the analysis of dc and steady state poly-phase circuits
to use electrical instruments for practical measurements
practice null balance method using bridges for accurate
measurements
use Oscilloscope to measure dynamic circuit parameters
have practical exposure to working environment in electrical
engineering
understand the construction and control of basic electrical
machines.
know the basic computer maintenance and PCB fabrication
procedure
Total ECTS of the

10
module
Time allocation
Lecture
10*27=270
48
Course Number
ECEG-1061
ECEG-1062
ECEG-2063
Tutorial
Lab/prac
48
96
Course Name
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
76
Home study
78
ECTS
6
2
2
September 2012

Course Title: Fundamentals of Electrical
Pre-requisites: GEng-1012: Introduction to
Engineering : 4 (3,3,0)
Engineering Skill
Math-1022: Applied mathematics II (Corequisite)
Course Number: ECEG-1061`
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: II
Module: Basics of electrical engineering
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives & Competences To enable students to understand the basic
to be Acquired
electromagnetic phenomenon, circuit variables and
parameters
To enable students to apply the fundamental and
derived circuit laws and theorems to the analysis of
dc and steady state poly-phase ac circuits;
Review of Electromagnetic Phenomenon and
Contents
Variables
Charge, Coulomb's Law, electric field, voltage,
current, energy and power; Faraday's Law-self and
mutual inductances
Electric Circuit parameters
Circuit, energy and, geometrical view points of
circuits parameters (R, C, L); electric sources
(ideal/real; independent/dependent). DC Circuit
Analysis with fundamental and derived circuit laws
Circuit Analysis:
Kirchhoff's laws (KVL & KCL); circuits
simplifications (series and parallel connections of
R, L, C and sources); star (Y) - delta ()
transformation; mesh analysis; nodal analysis;
linearity and the superposition theorem; Thevenin's
and Norton's theorems; maximum power transfer;
Steady State Single Phase AC Circuit Analysis:
Sinusoidal terminologies; instantaneous, average
and effective (rms) values; phasor representation of
sinusoids and arithmetic; series and parallel RLC
circuits; immittance (impedance or admittance);
frequency response and resonance; active (average),
reactive and apparent powers; power factor; power
77
September 2012
factor correction; maximum power transfer in ac

circuits; load/power flow method of ac circuit
analysis.
Transient Circuit Analysis:
First Order Transient Circuits: RL and RC
Transient Characteristics and Solutions; Second
Order Transient Circuits: RLC Transient Circuits;
Higher Order Circuits and Approximations; Three
Phase AC Circuits:
Introduction to polyphase systems;
Generation of three phase voltages; star (Y) and
delta () connections; load/power flow method of
three phase ac circuit analysis; power in unbalanced
three phase systems.
Course Outline
Content
CHAPTER 1
Basic Concepts:
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Charge, Current and Voltage
1.3 Coulombs Law
1.4 Faradays Law
CHAPTER 2
Electric Circuit: Parameters
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Ohms Law
2.3 Nodes, Branches, and Loops
2.4 KVL and KCL
2.5 Circuit simplification
2.6 Wye-Delta Transformation
CHAPTER 3
AC Circuit Analysis:
3.1 Introduction
3.2 sinusoids and Phasors
3.3 Impedance Combination
3.4 AC power Analysis
3.5 Frequency Response
CHAPTER 4
Transient Circuit Analysis:
4.1 Introduction
4.2 First Order Transient circuits
4.3 Second Order Transient
circuits
4.4 Higher Order Transient
Circuits
4.5 Three Phase AC circuits
CHAPTER 5
Introduction to Polyphase
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
Introduces basic concepts such as 2 Weeks
current , voltage, power
To introduce some fundamental 2 Weeks

circuit laws and transformations
in order to actually determine the
values of circuit variables.
To introduce the time-varying 3 Weeks

excitation of circuits by sinusoid.
To apply Kirchhoffs law and
Ohms law for AC circuits.
To introduce Frequency response
of simple circuits.
To enable students to analyze 4 Weeks
RC, RL, and RLC Circuits and
apply Kirchhoffs law to
determine circuit variables.
To induce basics of Polyphase 3 Weeks

systems and introduce how Y-
78

Systems:
5.1 Generation of three Phase
Voltages
5.2 Y- Connections
5.3 Load/Power Flow analysis
- Unbalanced power in 3
Literature
connections
are
polyphase systems.
September 2012
made
in

(40%)
Textbook:
H. Hyte & J.E. Kemmerly, Engineering
Circuit Analysis
References:
A.E. Fitzgerald & D.E. Higginbotham, Basic
Electrical Engineering
Siskind ,Electrical Circuits
Cook and Carn, Elements of Electrical
Engineering
T.F. Bogart, Electric Circuits
79
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical engineering Lab I:
1(0,0,3)
ECTS Credit: 2
Semester: II
Module: Basics of electrical engineering
Module Coordinator: TBA.
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
The course enables students

To use electrical instruments for practical
measurements
To practice null balance method using bridges for
accurate measurements
To practice measurement of dynamic parameters by
oscilloscope
Basic DC Voltage and Current Measurements and
Range Extension
Resistance Measurements with Ohmmeters and DC
bridges
AC voltage and Current Measurement with AC
indicators and Oscilloscope
Experimental Analysis of RL ,RC and RLC
Transients
Power Measurements
Power Factor Improvement
Laboratory Exercise.
Lab Reports (25%), Demonstration (20%)
Participation (15%), Final Exam (40%)
100% lab attendance
Textbook:
References:
Laboratory manuals provided in the lab
80
September 2012

Wolaita sodo University, College of Engineering
Course Title: Electrical Workshop Practice I Pre-requisites: None
: 1 (0,0,3)
ECTS Credit: 2
Semester: III
Module: Basics of Electrical engineering
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents

Literature
The course aims:

To enable students to have practical exposure to
working environment in electrical engineering.
Workshop Safety Rules;
General Soldering Information;
Internal Installation Practice;
Splicing;
Two lamps controlled from two different places by
means of two two-way switches;
Two lamps controlled from three different places by
means of two two-way and one intermediate switches;
Two lamps controlled from four different places by
means of two two-way and two intermediate switches;
Bell switch;
Annunciator circuits.
Workshop Practice
Report (25%), Mid-exam (20%)
100% W/S attendance
Textbook:
References:
Handouts provided by the Staff
81
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
07
Applied Electronics
Module Applied Electronics enables students to understand concepts in
electronics devices, their characteristics and applications and electronic
circuits design.
basic concepts of electronic circuits with the aid of characteristic
curves
sample applications and design guidelines of electronic circuits
advanced electronic circuits and their application
simulation of electronic circuits using application packages
digital system components and their design
work with active semiconductor devices and circuits
visually see the harmonics in rectifier circuits
understand the difference between power amplification and signal
amplification
understand the importance of negative feedback in an amplifier
understand and appreciate the input differential DC coupled stage
of an operational amplifier
understand the positive feedback and its application in oscillator
understand design of simple switching and trigger circuits
Total ECTS of the

17
module
Time allocation
lecture
17*27=459
64
Course Number
ECEG-2071
ECEG-2072
ECEG-2073
ECEG-2074
tutorial
Lab/prac
96
96
Course Name
82
Home study
203
ECTS
6
5
3
3
September 2012

Course Title: Applied Electronics I : 3(2,3,0) Pre-requisites:
ECEG-1061: Fundamental of Electrical
Engineering
ECEG-2073: Electrical Engineering Lab II
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: III
Module: Applied Electronics
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
The course objective is:

To discuss basic concepts of electronic circuits with
the aid of characteristic curves
To introduce sample applications and design
guidelines of electronic circuits
Basic semiconductor theory
Atomic theory, semiconductor materials and their
types
Semiconductor diodes and their applications
Characteristics, analysis of diode circuits, diode
types, applications of diode circuits, voltage
regulators, power supplies
Bipolar junction transistors
Introduction, principle of operation and
characteristics, BJT configurations, biasing
methods Small Signal BJT amplifiers and
parametric representations
Field effect transistors
Introduction, Equivalents circuits and biasing
techniques, FET Types, Parametric representations
Frequency response of amplifiers
Basic concepts, types of frequency response,
frequency response of BJT and FET amplifiers
Multistage amplifiers
Coupling methods, analysis of gain and other
parameters, frequency response
Power amplifiers
Classification and analysis, efficiency, push pull
amplifiers, distortion and thermal effects
83
September 2012
Tuned Amplifiers
Single and double tuned amplifiers, bandwidth,
parallel and series resonance, ideal band pass
amplifier
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
CHAPTER 1:
Introduce basic concepts such as 1 week
Basic semiconductor
atomic
structure
and
theory
semiconductors
especially
1.1.Introduction
silicon and germanium.
1.2.Atomic theory
1.3.semiconductor
materials and their
types
CHAPTER 2
At the end of this chapter, 2 weeks
Semiconductor diodes and
students are be able to
their applications
understand what Diodes are and
2.1. introduction
their application and also
2.2. Characteristics of diodes
analyze Diode circuits.
2.3. analysis of diode circuits
2.4. diode types
2.5. applications of diode
circuits
2.6. power supplies
CHAPTER 3
Bipolar junction transistors
3.1. introduction
3.2.principle of operation and
characteristics of BJT
3.2.1. BJT configurations
3.2.2. biasing methods
3.2.3. Small Signal BJT
amplifiers and parametric
representations

students will be able to
understand BJT, and their
principle of operation and
configuration
and
biasing
techniques.
CHAPTER 4
Field effect transistors
4.1. Introduction
4.2.Equivalents circuits and
biasing techniques of FET
4.3. FET Types
At the end of this chapter, 2weeks

students are able to understand
FET, their principle of operation
equivalent
circuits
and
parametric representation.
84
September 2012
4.4. Parametric representations
CHAPTER 5
Frequency response of
amplifiers
5.1. Basic concepts
5.2. types of frequency response
5.3. frequency response of BJT
and FET amplifiers
At the end of this lesson, 2 weeks

the frequency response of BJT
and FET and the types of
frequency responses.
CHAPTER 6
Multistage amplifiers
6.1. introduction
6.2. Coupling methods
6.3. analysis of gain and other
parameters
6.4. frequency response
At the end of this chapter, the 2 weeks

student will be able to
understand what the Multistage
Amplifiers are and how to
couple
amplifiers
in
to
multistage configuration and
their analysis.
CHAPTER 7
Power amplifiers
7.1. introduction
7.2. Classification and analysis
7.3. efficiency
7.4. push pull amplifiers
7.5.distortion and thermal effects

what power amplifiers are and
analyze
those interns
of
efficiency.
And also introduce what push
pull amplifiers are.
CHAPTER 8
Tuned Amplifiers
8.1. introduction
8.2. Single and double tuned
amplifiers
8.3. bandwidth
8.4. parallel and series
resonance
8.5. ideal band pass amplifier

what tuned amplifiers are and
their classification.
And also introduce band width,
parallel and series resonance.

System
Literature

(40%)
Textbook:
Robert Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky:
Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory
References:
Malvino, Electronic Principles
John Bird, Electrical and Electronic
technology
85
September 2012
B.L Thrraja and A.K Theraja, Text book of

electrical technology

Course Title: Applied Electronics II :
Pre-requisites: ECEG-2071: Applied
3(2,3,0)
Electronics I
ECEG-2074: Electrical Engineering Lab III
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IV
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives & Competences To discuss advanced electronic circuits and their
to be Acquired
application
To simulate electronic circuits using application
packages
To introduce digital system components and their
design
Feedback amplifiers
Contents
Types of feedback, basic representation, topologies
and analysis of feedback amplifiers, effect of
feedback on different parameters
Differential amplifiers
Response for differential inputs, small signal
analysis, common mode rejection ratio
Operational amplifier
OP-Amp basics, parameters, inverting and noninverting configurations, frequency response and
compensation, practical OP-Amps, OP-Amp
applications
Waveshaping Circuits
Waveform generator circuits, sample and hold
circuits, Schmitt trigger circuits,
multivibrators, astable, monostable and bi-stable
circuits, timer circuits
Oscillators
Modulator and demodulator circuits
Digital electronics
86
September 2012
Brief overview of Basic and derived logic gates,

Realization of discrete logic gates, Digital
integrated circuits and logic families, comparison of
common logic families
Introduction to IC fabrication techniques
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
CHAPTER 1
2 weeks
Feedback amplifiers
Introduction
1.1.Types of feedback
At the end of this chapter, students are able to
1.2.basic representation
understand what feedback amplifiers are and
1.3.topologies
and
topologies and analysis of feedback amplifiers.
analysis of feedback
amplifiers
Analyze the effects of feedback in amplifiers.
1.4.effect of feedback on
different parameters
CHAPTER 2
Differential amplifiers
2.1.
Introduction
to
differential inputs.
2.2.
Response
for
differential inputs
2.3. small signal analysis
2.4.
common
mode
rejection ratio
CHAPTER THREE
Operational amplifier
3.1. introduction
3.2. OPAmp basics
3.3. parameters of opamp
3.4. Inverting and noninverting configurations
and their mathematical
analysis.
3.5. frequency response
and
compensation
3.6. practical OPAmps
3.7. OPAmp applications
CHAPTER FOUR
Wave
shaping
Circuits
Introduction
4.1. Waveform generator
circuits
4.2. sample and hold
circuits
4.3. sample and hold
2 weeks
understand what differential amplifiers are and
response for differential inputs and also small
signal analysis and common mode rejection.
3 weeks
understand what op-amps are and their analysis
and application.
3 weeks
understand what wave shaping circuits,
sampling, multivibrators, oscillators, modulators,
and analysis of all the above circuit forms.
87
September 2012
circuits
4.4. Schmitt trigger circuits
4.5. multivibrators
4.6. astable, monostable
and bi-stable circuits
4.7. timer circuits
4.8. Oscillators
4.9. Modulator and
demodulator circuits
CHAPTER FIVE
Digital electronics
5.1. Brief overview of
Basic and derived logic
gates
5.2. Realization of discrete
logic gates
5.3. Digital integrated
circuits and logic families
5.4. comparison of
common logic families
CHAPTER SIX
Introduction to IC
fabrication techniques
6.1. IC fabrication
techniques.
6. 2. The principle of
operation of digital IC
fabrication techniques.
6.3. linear digital ICs
Literature
3 weeks
understand what digital electronics, logic gates,
digital ICs are and
2 weeks
understand and apply the techniques of digital IC
fabrication and their principle of operation.

Textbook:
Jacob Millman, Microelectronics Digital and
Analog Circuits and Systems
References:
Tesfaye Bayou, Engineering Electronics
Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals
V.P. Nelson, H. T. Nagle, B.D. Carroll, J.D. Irwin:
Digital Logic, Circuit Analysis and Design
Chirlian PM, Analysis and Design of Integrated
Electronics Circuits
Electrical and Electronic technology by John Bird
Text book of electrical technology by B.L Thrraja
and A.K Theraja
88
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Engineering Lab II : Pre-requisites:
1 (0,0,3)
ECEG-1062: Electrical Engineering Lab I
ECEG-2071: Applied Electronics I (Corequisite)
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: III
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
To introduce working with active semiconductor

devices and circuits
To visually see the harmonics in rectifier circuits
T
o understand the difference between power
amplification and signal amplification
Basic Measurements on Characteristics of Electronic
Devices and Circuits
V-I characteristics of a diode IN4001 forward and
reverse bias
Half wave and full wave rectifier , measurement of
RMS voltages, L-C filter, ripple
Load regulation of a full wave rectifier 50%, 100%
BJT characteristics
BJT characteristics
Single stage RC coupled amplifier frequency
response measurements
Two stage cascaded amplifier
Class B push pull amplifier
Tuned amplifier with a tank circuit
100% lab attendance
Textbook:
References:
89
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Engineering Lab III Pre-requisites:
:
ECEG-2073: Electrical Engineering Lab II
1 (0,0,3)
ECEG-2072: Applied Electronics II (Corequisite)
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: IV
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
To understand the importance of negative feedback

in an amplifier
To understand and appreciate the input differential
DC coupled stage of an operational amplifier
To understand the positive feedback and its
application in oscillator.
To understand design of simple switching and trigger
circuits
Feedback Amplifier
Differential Amplifier
Operational Amplifier
Oscillators
Schmitt Triggers
Multi-vibrator
Timers
Switching Circuits
100% lab attendance
Textbook:
References:
90
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
10
Signals and Network Analysis
Module Signals and Networks Analysis enables students to understand
and apply the representation, classification, characterization and analysis
of signals and systems in time and frequency domains.
The courses of this module will enable students to:
apply the representation, classification, characterization and
analysis of signals and systems in time and frequency domains
understand and apply the techniques of modeling, analysis, design
and synthesis of 1- and 2-port passive and active electric networks
and filters in a classical and a modern approach
add to their knowledge-base in the fundamentals of electrical
engineering modeling and design.
Total ECTS of the

24
module
Time allocation
Lecture
24*27=640
144
Course Number
ECEG-2081
ECEG-3082
ECEG-3083
ECEG-3085
Tutorial
Lab/prac
192
0
Course Name
Probability and Random processes
91
Home study
304
ECTS
7
6
5
6
September 2012

Course Title: Signal and Systems Analysis : Pre-requisites: Math-2023: Applied
4 (3,3,0)
mathematics III (Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 7
Semester: IV
Module: Signals and Network Analysis
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives & Competences Enable student to understand and apply the
to be Acquired
representation, classification, characterization and
analysis of signals and systems in time and frequency
domains
Introduction
Contents
Characterization, classification, and
representation/modeling of signals and systems
Signal Approximation
Orthogonal/orthonormal and basis functions; error
to signal energies ratio.
Fourier Series Representation of Periodic Signals
Trigonometric & exponential Fourier series,
frequency and power spectrums, error to signal
energies ratio.
Singularity Functions
The impulse, step and ramp functions;
discontinuous functions.
Convolution
Signals as a continuum of impulses; impulse
responses; analytical, graphical and numerical
evaluation of convolution
Ordinary Linear Differential Equations (OLDE)
Single and system of OLD equations.
Fourier Transforms and Inverse Transforms
Properties, energy spectrum, transform theorems,
system functions.
The Sampling Theorem
Ideal and real sampling, Nyquist rate.
Laplace Transforms
Properties, relationship between Fourier and
Laplace transforms; system functions;
Inverse Laplace Transforms
Partial fraction method, modified power series
methods, evaluations from pole-zero plots; systems
response, solutions to integro-differential equations;
Z-Transforms and Inverse Transforms
Discrete signals and systems, the Z-transform &
92
September 2012
inverse transform; system functions; difference

equations and their solutions
Introduction
to
Discrete
Time
Fourier
Transform(DTFT)
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1.1 Characterization, classification, and
representation/modeling of signals and
systems
1.2 Elementary Signals
-The Unit Step Function
-The unit-Ramp Function
-The Delta Function(the sampling &
Shifting property)
1.3 Signal Approximation
Orthogonal/orthonormal and basis
functions; error to signal energies ratio.
CHAPTER 2
The Laplace Transform
2.1 Definition of the Laplace
Transformation
2.2 Properties &Theorems of the Laplace
Transform
Linearity, Time
Shifting ,Frequency shifting and
Scaling properties
Differentiation in Time &
frequency Domain property
Integration in Time & frequency
Domain property
Time Periodicity property
Initial & Final value theorem
Convolution in Time & Frequency
Domain
2.3 The Laplace Transform of common
Functions of Time
LP transform of Unit Step Function,
Ramp Function, tnUo(t) and Delta &
Delayed Delta function and the like.
2.4 The Laplace Transform of common
wave Form
LP transform of a pulse ,Linear
Segment, Triangular Waveform
and Rectangular Periodic
Waveform
Chapter Objective
Time
Allotted
1 weeks
To introduce students about

basic Concept of Signals and
Systems.
The Students should know
about elementary Signals and
Signal approximation
The Students will be able to

apply definitions of LP
Transform.
The students should also know

about Properties &Theorems
of the Laplace Transform, and
LP Transform of Common
functions and Wave forms.
93
2 weeks

CHAPTER 3
The Inverse Laplace Transform
3.1 The Inverse Laplace Transform
Integral
3.2 Partial Fraction Expansion
Distinct Poles ,Complex Poles and
Multiple (Repeated ) Poles
3.3 Case where F(s) is Improper Rational
function
3.4Alternate Method of Partial Fraction
Expansion
CHAPTER 4
The Impulse Response and Convolution:
4.1 The Impulse Response in Time domain
4.2 Even and Odd Functions of Time
4.3 Convolution
4.4 Graphical Evaluation of the
Convolution Integral
4.5 Circuit Analysis with Convolution
Integral
September 2012
1 weeks
The student should be able to

identify, apply and find the
Inverse Transform of different
functions
The student will be able to 1 weeks

evaluate the Convolution of
two or more Functions using
graphical
and
algebraic
method.
The students will know the
Impulse Response in time
Domain.
Enable the student to analysis
different Circuit using
Convolution Integral
CHAPTER 5
Fourier Series
5.1 Wave Analysis
5.2 Evaluation of the coefficients
Symmetry in Square
Waveform ,Saw tooth
Waveform ,Triangular Waveform
and Fundamental, Second ,and
Third Harmonics
5.3 Trigonometric Form of Fourier Series
for Common Waveforms
Square Waveform ,Saw tooth
Waveform ,Triangular
Waveform ,Half wave Rectifier
and Full-wave Rectifier
5.4 Alternate Form of the Trigonometric
Fourier Series
5.5 The Exponential Fourier Series
5.6 Symmetry in Exponential Fourier
Series
Even Functions ,Odd
Functions ,Half-wave Rectifier ,No
symmetry and Relation of C-n to Cn
CHAPTER 6
Fourier Transform:
6.1 Definition and Special Forms
3 weeks
The Students will be able to

Represent finite and infinite
signals using Fourier Series.
3 weeks
94
September 2012
6.2 Special Forms of the Fourier Transform
Real and Imaginary Time Functions

6.3 Properties &Theorems of the Fourier
Transform
Linearity ,Time Shifting and
Symmetry
Frequency shifting ,Time Scaling
and Time Differentiation
frequency Differentiation ,Time
Integration , Frequency
Convolution
and Time Convolution
Conjugate Time & Frequency

Function
Parsevals Theorem
6.4 Fourier Transform Pairs of Common
Functions
The Delta Function Pair and the
Constant Function Pair
The Cosine Function Pair and the
Sine Function Pair
The Signum Function Pair and the
Unit Step Function Pair
6.5 Derivation of Fourier Transform from
the Laplace Transform
6.6 Fourier Transform of Common Wave
Form
CHAPTER 7
Discrete Time Systems and the Z
Transform
7.1 Definition and Special Forms of the Z
Transform
7.2 Properties &Theorems of the Z
Transform
Linearity ,Shift of f[n]uo[n] in the
Discrete Time Domain
Right and Left Shift in the Discrete
Time Domain
Multiplication by an , n, n2 and e-naT
in the Discrete Time Domain
Summation in the Discrete Time
Domain
Convolution in the Discrete Time
and Frequency Domain
Initial & Final value theorem
7.3 The Z transform of Common Discrete
Time Functions
The Transform of the Geometric
Sequence , Discrete Time unit
The Student will be able to

apply definitions of Fourier
Transform and able to derive
the Fourier Transform from
Laplace Transform.
The students should also know

of the Fourier Transform, and
the Fourier Transform pair of
Common functions and Wave
forms.
3 weeks
The Student will be able to
apply definitions of Z
Transform and Special Forms
of the Z Transform
Identify Properties &Theorems

of the Z Transform, and the Z
Transform of Common
functions.
To enable the Students to find
the Inverse Z Transform using
different Methods..
95
September 2012
Step Function , discrete time

Exponential Sequence , Discrete
Time Cosine and Sine Functions
and Discrete Time unit Ramp
Function
Computation of Z Transform with
Contour Integration
Transformation B/n S-and ZDomains
The Inverse Z Transform
Partial Fraction
Expansion
The Inversion Integral
Long Division of
Polynomials
The Transfer Function of Discrete
Time Systems
CHAPTER 8
The Discrete Fourier Transform
8.1 Even and Odd Properties of the DFT
8.2 Common Properties and Theorems of
DFT
Linearity, Time Shifting and
Frequency shifting
Frequency and Time Convolution
8.3 The Sampling Theorem
Nyquist rate
Assessment/Evaluation & Grading System
Literature
1 week
The students should know
of DFT, and The Sampling
Theorem, Nyquist rate

laboratory exercises
Examination (40%)
Textbook:
Signals And Systems ,Third Edition by
Steven T.Karris
References:
Advance Engineering Mathematics, E.
Kreyzig
Signals and Linear Systems, R.A. Gabel &
Richard A. Roberts
Signals and Linear Systems, Lathi
Introduction to Signals and Systems and
Digital Signal Processing, M.N.
Bandyopadhayay
96
September 2012

Course Title: Network Analysis and
Pre-requisites: ECEG-2081: Signals and
Synthesis :
Systems Analysis
3 (2,3,0)
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: V
Module: Signals and Networks Analysis
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Understand and apply the techniques of modeling,

analysis, design and synthesis of 1- and 2- port
passive and active electric networks and filters in a
classical and a modern approach
Introduction to network analysis and synthesis
Networks and their developmental stages; analysis,
design and analysis concepts; network
characterizations and theorems
Network transform representation and analysis
Analysis of first and second order circuits: Step and
impulse responses; frequency response and Bode
plotting Sources and R, L, C & M parameters in sdomain; transformed network equations and
analysis; network functions - driving point (dp) or
immitance (1 -port) functions, transfer (2 -port)
functions; network poles & zeros versus time and
frequency responses
Elements of realizability theory
Causality and stability - time and frequency domain
criterions; restrictions on pole-zero locations of dp
and transfer functions; Hurwitz polynomials; the
Routh - Hurwitz array; positive real functions;
Brune's conditions
Synthesis of dp functions (one port networks)
Elementary synthesis procedures - removal of a
pole/s at the origin, infinity, and on the j axis in
the complex s-plane; removal of minimum
resistance/conductance; Foster and Cauer I & II
realizations -synthesis of LC, RC, RL and general
R,L,C & M dp functions.
Two port networks
Z -, Y-, H-, and ABCD parameters; relationship
among 2-port parameters; parallel, series, and
cascade interconnections; properties - symmetry,
reciprocity, and balanced-ness; configurations: T-,
-, H-, Q- and bridge (lattice) networks.
97

Literature
September 2012
Synthesis of transfer functions (two port networks)

Auxiliary functions - transmission and reflection
coefficients; the insertion loss technique
(Darlington's method); the zero shifting technique;
terminated two port networks
Active network synthesis
Active network building blocks; synthesis of active
networks;
Filter types, specifications and classical syntheses
techniques
Filter categorization and specification; classical
filter design techniques - image parameter
technique, constant- k filters, m-derived filters,
composite filters
Modern technique of passive filter synthesis
Modern techniques- Butterworth & Chebyshev
approximations of passive normalized low pass
(NLP) filter design; parameter normalization
(scaling)/de-normalization with respect to
frequency and/or impedance; synthesis of high
pass (HP), band pass (BP) & band rejection (BR)
filters - frequency transformation techniques
Synthesis of active filters
Active filters - merits & demerits with respect to
passive filters; active filter structures and design single amplifier second order structure (LP, HP, BP
and BR filters); bi-quad structures; higher order
active filters; transformation of passive RLC filters
into active realization
Lectures supported by tutorials, assignment and
Textbook:
References:
Network Analysis, M. T. Van Valkendeeg
Network Analysis and Synthesis, F.F. Kuo
Circuit Design, Temes and Lapatra
Network Theory and Filter Design, V.K. Aatre
Passive and Active Network Analysis and
Synthesis, Budak
Principles of Active Network Synthesis and Design,
G. Darayanani
Modern Filter Theory and Design, G.C Temes &
S.K. Mitra
Synthesis of Passive Networks: Theory and
Methods appropriate to the realization and
approximation problems, Guillemin, Ernst Adolph
Integrated & active network analysis and synthesis,
Paul Chirlian & Everitt (editor}
98
September 2012
Basic circuit theory, Charles A. Desoer & Ernst S.

Kuh

Wolaita SodoUniversity, College of Engineering
Course Title: Probability and Random
Pre-requisites: Math-2023: Applied
Processes : 3 (2,3,0)
Mathematics III
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: V
Module: Signal Processing and Network
Analysis
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To introduce the basic probabilistic methods

applicable to science and engineering problems and
familiarize students of statistical transform
techniques.
Introduction
Mathematical models; Deterministic models;
Probability models; Statistical regularity. Properties
of relative frequency; The axiomatic approach to a
theory of probability; Building a probability model.
Basic Concepts of Probability Theory
Specifying random experiments; The sample space.
Events. Set operations; The axioms of probability;
Discrete sample spaces. Continuous sample spaces;
Sampling with replacement and with ordering.
Sampling without replacement and with ordering.
Permutations of n distinct objects; Sampling
without replacement and without ordering.
Sampling with replacement and without ordering;
Conditional probability. Bayes' Rule; Independence
of events. Sequential experiments. Sequences of
independent experiments. The binomial probability
law. The multinomial probability law. The
geometric probability law. Sequences of dependent
experiments.
Random Variables
The notion of a random variable; The cumulative
distribution function; The three types of random
variables; The probability density function;
Conditional cdf's and pdf's; Some important
random variables; Discrete random variables;
Continuous random variables; Functions of a
random variable; The expected value of random
variables; Variance; The Markov and Chebyshev
inequalities; Testing the fit of a distribution to data;
Transform methods; The characteristic function;
The probability generating function; The Laplace
99

Literature
September 2012
transform of the pdf.

Multiple Random Variables
Vector random variables; Events and probabilities;
Independence; Pairs of random variables. Pairs of
discrete random variables; The joint cdf of X and
Y; The joint pdf of two jointly continuous random
variables; Random variables that differ in type;
Independence of two random variables. Conditional
probability and conditional expectation;
Conditional probability; Conditional expectation;
Multiple random variables; Joint distributions;
Independence;
Expected value of functions of random variables;
The correlation and covariance of two random
variables; Joint characteristic function; Jointly
Gaussian random variables
Parameter estimation and introduction to Linear
mean square estimation
Introduction to Random Processes
Lecture supported by tutorial
Textbook:
Albert Leon-Garcia ,Probability and Random
Processes for Electrical Engineering, 2/E
Publisher: Prentice Hall, 1994
References:
D. Bertsekas and J. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to
Probability.
A.Drake, Fundamentals of Applied Probability
Theory.
S. Ross, A First Course in Probability.
100
September 2012
Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Course Title: Digital Signal Processing: 3
Pre-requisites: ECEG-2081: Signals and
(2-3-0)
Systems Analysis
ECEG-3101: Digital Logic Design
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VI
Module: Signal Processing and network
analysis
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Introduce students to methods of discrete-time

signals and systems representation and analysis
Introduce design methods and realization structures
of discrete-time systems.
Introduce signal processing applications using signal
processing development kits for a chosen DSP chip
Introduce simulation using MATLAB.
Time-domain representation and analysis of discretetime signals and systems (9 hrs.)
Transform-domain representation and analysis of
discrete-time signals and systems (6 hrs.)
Discrete-time system realization (6 hrs.)
DTFT and FFT algorithms (9 hrs.)
Design of Discrete-time systems (6 hrs.)
Decimation and Interpolation (6 hrs.)
Introduction to discrete-time random signals (3 hrs.)
Three hours per week will be used for tutorials and
simulation exercises.
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objectives
Methodology
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1.1 Basic elements of
DSP system
1.2 Digital Vs. Analog
signal processing
1.3 Classification of
Signals
1.4 Analog-to-Digital and
Digital-to-Analog
conversion
Introduce the basics in Lectures supported

Digital
Signal by Tutorial and
Processing.
Assignments
CHAPTER 2
Determine
Time
Allotted
2 Weeks
Distinguish
between
types of signals
Describe
Sampling
process
by
which
Analog signals are
converted into Digital.
different Lectures supported
101
3 Weeks

Discrete Time Signals and
Systems
2.1 Discrete-Time Signals
- Classification
- Simple manipulations
2.2 Discrete-Time
Systems
- Classifications
- Interconnections
2.3 Analysis of DiscreteTime Linear Time
Invariant Systems
2.4 Discrete Time
Systems in Difference
Equations
2.5 Correlation of Discrete
Time Signals
CHAPTER 3
The Z-Transform
3.1 Direct and Inverse ZTransform
3.2 Properties of ZTransform
3.3 Poles and Zeros
3.4 Analysis of LTI
system in the Z-Transform
CHAPTER 4
Frequency Analysis of
Signals and Systems
4.1 Fourier analysis of
discrete time signals
4.2 Properties of Fourier
Transform
4.3 Frequency Domain
Characteristics of LTI
systems
CHAPTER 5
Discrete Time Fourier
Transform
5.1 Discrete Domain
Sampling
5.2 Properties of DFT
5.3 Frequency Analysis of
signals using DFT
5.4 FFT algorithms
5.5 Applications of FFT
algorithms
CHAPTER 6
Introduction to Multi-rate
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Decimation by factor
September 2012
characterizations
of by Tutorial and
Discrete time Systems. Matlab exercise
Assignments
Determine the output of
and LTI system for any
input
signal
using
convolution formula.
Develop Input Output
relationship
using
Difference equations.
Develop Z transform of Lectures supported

a system.
by Tutorial
2 Weeks
Determine
state/stability of the
system based on Poles
and Zeros of its transfer
function.
Analyze LTI systems Lectures supported
using
Fourier by Tutorial and
Transform.
Matlab Project
Represent signals
Fourier Domain.
3 Weeks
in
Analyze signals using Lectures supported

Discrete Time Fourier by Tutorial and
Transform.
Assignments
3 Weeks
Apply FFT as and

Efficient Computation
of DFT.
Introduce the basics of Reading Assignment

Sampling
Rate + Tutorial
Conversion.
Apply Sampling rate
102
2 Weeks
September 2012
D
Reduction
and
6.3 Interpolation by factor
Sampling rate increase ,
I
D and I.
laboratory exercises (Matlab).
System
(40%)
Literature

Textbook:
A. Oppenheim and Schafer, Discrete-time
Signal Processing, Prentice Hall. (Ch 2,3,4
and 5)
References:
S. J. Orfanidis, Introduction to Signal
Processing, Prentice Hall
J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis,
Introduction to Digital Signal Processing,
Macmilan Publishing Company. (Ch. 1,6)
V. K. Ingle and J. G. Proakis, Digital Signal
Processing Using Matlab V.4, PWS
Publishing Company.
103
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
09
Basics of Electrical Machines
Module Electrical Engineering II enables students to understand
construction and principle of operation of transformers and electrical
machines; analyze operating and regulation characteristics.
Understand basic concepts of electromagnetic circuits as they
relate to voltages, currents, and physical forces induced in
conductors.
Understand and gain insight into principles of operation &
construction of transformer, induction machines, D.C. machines,
and synchronous machines.
Learn and understand analytical models for transformers and
electrical rotating machines.
use models to analyze power requirements, power capability,
efficiency and operating characteristics
measure and obtain equivalent circuit of electrical machines
perform no load and full load tests on transformers and induction
motor
be able to measure speed versus torque characteristics
12
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
lecture
12*27=324
32
Course Number
ECEG-3091
ECEG-3092
ECEG-2093
tutorial
Lab/prac
48
144
Course Name
Introduction to Electrical Machines
104
Home study
100
ECTS
5
3
4
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Electrical
Pre-requisites:
Machines : 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-2052: Electromagnetic Fields
ECEG-3092: Electrical Engineering Lab IV
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: V
Module: Basics of Electrical Machines
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To understand basic concepts of electromagnetic

circuits as they relate to voltages, currents, and
physical forces induced in conductors.
To understand and gain insight into principles of
operation & construction of transformer, induction
machines, D.C. machines, and synchronous
machines.
To learn and understand analytical models for
transformers and electrical rotating machines.
To use models to analyze power requirements, power
capability, efficiency and operating characteristics.
Magnetics
Field properties, materials, saturation & hysteresis,
magnetic circuits, iron loses, Production of an
EMF, Production of electromagnetic force-torque.
Transformers
Principle of action, construction, ideal & practical
models, parameter testing, voltage regulation,
efficiency, 3-phase transformers, connection
groups.
3-Phase Induction Machines
Revolving field, construction, synchronous speed &
slip, rotor & equivalent circuit models, determine
parameter of the equivalent circuit, torque equation,
stall & starting torque, efficiency, torque-speed
curves, parameter measurement.
D.C Machines
Construction, armature reaction, commutation,
Characteristics of D.C generator, parallel operation,
and characteristics of D.C. motors.
Synchronous Machines
Construction, equivalent circuit, parameter testing,
and characteristics of synchronous machines as an
alternator, motor operation of synchronous
machine.
105
September 2012
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER-1
Magnetics
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Governing equations
Excitation Calculations
Theories
1.3 Saturation and Hysteresis
1.4 Eddy Currents and eddy
current loss
1.5 Torque and Force
Components
CHAPTER-2
Transformers
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Construction
2.3 The Ideal Transformer
2.4 Equivalent Circuits
2.5 Losses and Ratings
2.6 Per Unit System
2.7 Transformer Tests
Short Circuit. Tests
Open Circuit tests
2.8 Three Phase Transformers
2.9 Auto Transformers
CHAPTER-3
DC Machines
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Construction
3.3 Armature reaction
3.4 Commutation
3.5 Characteristics of DC
Generator
3.6 Parallel Operation of DC
Generators
3.7 Characteristics of DC
Motors
CHAPTER-4
Induction Machines
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Construction
4.3 Concept of Operation
Revolving Field
Slip
4.4 Torque Development
4.5 Operation of Induction
Machine near Synchronous
Speed
Chapter Objectives
Time Allotted
2 Weeks
To develop the Excitation Calculations

and understand theories with respect to
E M field Calculations.
To define and analyze hysteresis and
Saturation
3 Weeks
To explain the main components of a
typical Transformer.
To Differentiate between the ideal and
Practical Transformer Operation.
To analyze the equivalent circuit for
Open Circuit and Short Circuit tests.
To Describe the operation of Auto
Transformers.
3 Weeks
To Describe and gain insight into the
Construction and Principle of Operation
of DC machines.
To analyze how parallel operation of
DC Generators be effective.
3 Weeks
To Describe and gain insight into the
Construction and Principle of Operation
of Induction Machines.
To explain the Principle of operation of
Induction machine near Synchronous
speed.
To Analyze leakage inductance in
induction Machines and Starting in
106

4.6 Leakage inductance
4.7 Operating Characteristics
4.8 Starting of Induction
Motors
4.9 Multiple Pole Pairs
CHAPTER-5
Synchronous Machines
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Design and Principles of
operation
Wound Rotor
Permanent
5.1 Equivalent Circuit
5.2 Parameter testing
O.C.C
S.C.C
5.3 Operation of the Machine
connected
To Bus of
Constant V and F.
From source of
Variable V and F.
5.6 Brushless DC Machines
Literature
September 2012
Induction Motors.
3 Weeks
To Analyze the Equivalent Circuit to
determine certain parameters based on
the O.C.C and S.C.C.
To Differentiate brushless DC machine

from others in terms of Principle of
operation and Construction.

laboratory exercise.
(40%)
Textbook:
G. Mullisa: Introduction to Electrical
Machines
References:
J. Hindmarsh: Electrical Machines and their
Applications
Kosow: Electric Machinery and Control,
Prentice-Hall
Siskind: Electrical Machines, McGraw-Hill
Chapman: Electric Machinery Fundamentals,
McGraw-Hill
Fitzgerald, C. Kingsley, & S. D. Umans:
Electric Machinery
M.G. Say: Alternating Current Machines
107
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Engineering Lab IV Pre-requisites:
:
ECEG-2074: Electrical Engineering Lab III
1 (0,0,3)
ECEG-3091: Introduction to Electrical
Machines (Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 3
Semester: V
Module: Basics of electrical Machines
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
To measure and obtain equivalent circuit of electrical

machines
To perform no load and full load tests on
transformers and induction motor
To be able to measure speed versus torque
characteristics
Equivalent Circuit Determination and Parallel
Operation of a Transformer
Induction Machines No-Load and Open-Circuit
Tests
Speed and Torque Measurement
100% lab attendance
Textbook:
References:
108
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Workshop Practice
Pre-requisites: ECEG-2063: Electrical
II : 2 (0,0,6)
Workshop Practice I
ECTS Credit: 4
Module: Basics of Electrical machines
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature

Semester: IV
Lecturer: TBA
To enable students to understand the construction

and control of basic electrical machines.
Basic computer maintenance
PCB fabrication procedure
Transformer Winding
Induction Motor Winding (Cage Rotor Type)
Wiring of Relay Circuits
Computer Maintenance
PCB fabrication
Workshop Practice
Report (25%), Mid-exam (20%)
100% W/S attendance
Textbook:
None
References:
Handouts provided by the Staff
109
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
10
Computer Engineering
Module Computer Engineering equips students with profound
knowledge in realization of digital systems; architecture and organization
of a computer system and its components; and software development in
Object-Oriented programming.
principles of Digital Systems

property and realization of the various logic gates
to design Combinational and Sequential Systems
architecture and organization of a computer system and its
components
to design and simulate a basic computer system
Object oriented concepts and terminologies.
pure Object-Oriented Programming Language.
solid foundation for developing software using the object-oriented
paradigm
Total ECTS of the

19
module
Time allocation
lecture
19*27=513
128
Course Number
ECEG-3101
ECEG-3102
ECEG-3103
ECEG-2101
tutorial
Lab/prac
128
64
Course Name
Computer Architecture & Organization
110
Home study
193
ECTS
5
5
4
5
September 2012

Course Title: Digital Logic Design : 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,1,2)
ECEG-2072: Applied Electronics II,
ECEG-3092: Electrical Engg Lab IV (Corequisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: V
Module: Computer Engineering
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To introduce students with principles of Digital

Systems
To study property and realization of the various logic
gates
To make the student able to design Combinational
and Sequential Systems
Introduction to Digital Systems
Basic and Derived Logic Gates;
Discreet Logic Gates Realization;
Multi-vibrators;
Digital Integrated Circuits and Logic Families;
Comparison of Common Logic Families;
Introduction to Switching Algebra;
Design of Logic Systems;
Design of Combinational Logic Systems;
Memory Elements;
Design of Sequential Logic Systems;
Digital System Testing;
Faults in Digital Circuits; Test Generation for and
Testable Combinational Circuits; Test Generation
and Testable Sequential Circuits; Built-in Self Test
(BIST).
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Digital Concepts
1.1 Digital Vs. Analogue
1.2 Binary Digits and Basic
Logic Operations
1.3 Number Systems and
Operations
CHAPTER 2
Logic Gates and Boolean
Chapter Objectives
Time Allotted
Create distinction between Analogue 1 Week
and Digital systems.
To introduce basics of binary systems
as in digital electronics.
Describe the Operations of AND, OR 2 Weeks

and The Inverter.
111
September 2012
Algebra
2.1 Definition and Basic
Properties of Boolean
Algebra
2.2 Theorems of Boolean
Algebra
2.3 Boolean Functions
2.4 Basic and Derived Logic
Gates
- The Invertor
- The AND gate
- The OR Gate
- The NAND Gate
- The NOR Gate
- Exclusive Gates
CHAPTER 3
Simplification of Boolean
Functions
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Karnaugh Maps
3.3 SOP Minimization
3.4 POS Minimization
3.5 Higher Variable
Karnaugh Maps
CHAPTER 4
Combinational Logic
Analysis
4.1 Basic Combinational
Logic Circuits (CLCs)
4.2 Decoders and Encoders
4.3 Multiplexers
4.4 De-Multiplexers
4.5 Parity Generators and
Checkers
CHAPTER 5
Latches, Flip-flops and
Timers
5.1 Latches
5.2 Flip-Flops
5.3 Types of Flip-flops
5.4 One Shots
5.5 The 555 Timer
CHAPTER 6
Counters
To Express the operations of

exclusive-OR and exclusive-NOR.
Apply basic laws and rules of Boolean
algebra.
Evaluate Boolean expressions.
Convert any Boolean expression into 2 Weeks

sum-of-products (SOP).
Convert any Boolean expression into
Product-of-Sum (POS).
Use Karnaugh maps to simplify
Boolean expression And truth table
Functions.
Analyze combinational Logic Circuits. 2 Weeks
Develop the truth table from the
output expression Of CLC.
Design CLC for a given truth table.
Apply Multiplexers in Data selection.
Use decoders as De-multiplexers.
Use Logic Gates to construct basic 3 Weeks

Latches.
Recognize the d/c b/n Latches and
Flip-flops.
Connect the 555-timer to operate as
Astable Multi-vibrator or One Shot.
Analyze Counter timing Diagrams.
Analyze Counter Circuits
6.1 Assynchronous
112
1 Weeks
September 2012
Operation Counters
6.2 Synchronous Operation
Counters
- Up/Down Counters
6.3 Cascaded Counters
6.4 Counter Decoding
6.5 Counter Applications
CHAPTER 7
Shift Registers
Determine and modify modulus of a

Counter.
7.1 Basic Shift Register

Functions
7.2 Types of Shift Registers
7.3 Shift Register Counters
7.4 Shift Register
Applications
CHAPTER 8
Digital ICs and Logic
Families
Explain how SISO, SIPO, PISO, and

PIPO operate.
8.1 Characteristics of Digital

IC
8.2 Digital to Analog
Converters
8.3 Analog to Digital
Converters
8.4 Bipolar Transistor
Characteristics
- RTL
- DTL
- TTL
8.5 Comparison of Different
Logic Families
Describe the operation of DAC and

ADC circuits.
CHAPTER 9
Memory and Storage
9.1 Basics of Semiconductor
Theory
9.2 RAMs and ROMs
9.3 Programmable ROMs
Literature
Use up/down counters for generation

of binary sequences.
Identify forms of data movement in 2 Weeks

shift registers.
Construct a ring counter from shift

registers.
1 Week
Explain how CMOS and TTL families
Differ.
1 Week
Define basic memory Characteristics.
Explain what RAM is and how it
works.
Explain what ROM is and how it
works.
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment (on
Karnaugh Maps), project and laboratory
exercises.
(40%)
Textbook:
Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog
113
September 2012
Design, Brown and Vranesic, McGrawi-Hill

Publ.
References:
Floyd, Digital Electronics (Ch: 1,2,3,5,7,9)
Digital Principles and Logic Design (Ch.
2,3,6,8)
Switching Theory and Automata, Kohavi
M. Morris Mano, Digital Design
Enoch O. Hwang, Digital Logic and
Microprocessor Design with VHDL
Course Title: Computer Architecture and
Pre-requisites: ECEG-3101: Digital Logic
Organization : 3 (2,3,0)
Design
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VI
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To introduce the architecture and organization of a

computer system and its components
To design and simulate a basic computer system
General Introduction
Organization and architecture, computer evolution,
performance, models of a computer system
The Central Processing Unit
Computer arithmetic, Instruction sets, Instruction
format and addressing modes, CPU Structure, RISC
and CISC, Pipelining, The Control Unit (Hardwired
and Microprogrammed Implementations)
Memory Systems
Classification and hierarchy of Memory systems,
Main memory, Cache Memory, Secondary
Memory, Other types of memory, Memory
Management
Input Output Systems
Input Output devices, modes of transfer, I/O
interface,
Techniques used for I/O Operations: Programmed,
Interrupt-driven, Direct Memory Access
Advanced topics
Introduction to parallel processing, Low level data
structures, Introduction to operating systems
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objective
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Time Allotted
1 week
To differentiate between computer

114

1.1 Computer Organization Vs
Architecture
1.2 Computer Evolution and
performance
1.3 Modeling a computer system
CHAPTER 2
The Computer System
2.1 Memory system
2.1.1 Memory Hierarchy
2.1.2 Main memory
2.1.3 Cache Memory
2.1.4 Secondary Memory
2.1.5 Other types of memory
2.1.6 Memory Management
2.2 Input Output systems
2.2.1 Input Output devices
2.2.2 Programmed I/O
2.2.3 Interrupt-Driven I/O
2.2.4 Direct Memory
Access(DMA)
2.2.5 Buses
2.2.6 Input-Output Interfaces
September 2012
architecture and organization
To model a computer system so

that its detailed study is easy.
4 weeks
To understand parts of
computer system in detail.
To differentiate between main

memory, cache memory secondary
memory and other types of
memory.
To explore method of finding large

in size, very fast in speed, and Low
cost memory in computer system.
To understand mechanism of input

and output systems.
the
CHAPTER 3:
The Central processing unit
3.1 Computer arithmetic
3.2 Instruction Set Architecture and
design
3.2.1 Instruction sets
3.2.2 Instruction format
3.2.3 Addressing modes
3.3 CPU Structure and Function
3.4 RISC and CISC
3.5 Pipelining
5 weeks
To explain the concepts

computer arithmetic.
To clearly describe how CPU is

organized.
To understand CPU architecture

in detail.
Introduce concept of pipelining.
of
CHAPTER 4
The control Unit
2 weeks
Control unit operation

Micro Operations
Control of the Processor
Hard Wired Implementation
Micro programmed Control
Basic Concepts
Micro Instruction Sequencing
Micro Instruction Execution
Explain how the various elements

of the processor are controlled by
the control unit.
Apply the concept of microoperation to the control unit
implementation.
Explain the structure and function
of the micro-programmed control
unit.
115

CHAPTER 5
Introduction to Advanced
Computer Architecture
5.1 Introduction to parallel
processing
5.2 Low level data structures
5.3 Introduction to operating
systems
Literature
September 2012
3 weeks
To describe the principle behind

parallel operation in advanced
computer architecture.
To give students an introduction

to operating systems.

(40%)
Textbook:
William Stallings: Computer Organization
and Architecture
References:
M.M.Mano: Computer System Architecture
David A Patterson: John L.Hennessy:
Computer Architecture
Mostafa Abd-El-Barr: Hesham El-Rewini:
Fundamentals of computer Organization and
Architecture
116
September 2012

Course Title: Object-Oriented Programming Pre-requisites:
: 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-2101: Introduction to Computing
ECTS Credit: 4
Semester: VI
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To acquaint object oriented concepts and

terminologies.
To enable students to work with pure ObjectOriented Programming Language.
To provide a solid foundation for developing
software using the object-oriented paradigm
Object-Oriented Fundamentals
Objects and Classes, Attributes and Methods,
Features of OOP
Object-Oriented Programming Concepts
Data abstraction and Abstract Data Types,
Inheritance, Class hierarchy, Abstract class,
Polymorphism, Operator Overloading
More on Object-Oriented Programming
Events and Triggers, Data Streams, Introduction to
Web Programming, Web Pages and HTML,
Applets
Introduction
to
Object-Oriented
Software
Development
Object-Oriented Design Methodologies: Top Down
Approach, Decomposition, Use Case, ; Object
Relationship: Inheritance, Association,
Aggregation, ; Object-Oriented Analysis, Design
and Implementation
Introduction to Unified Modeling Language
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Object-Oriented Fundamentals
1.1 Why Do We Need ObjectOriented Programming?
1.1.1 Procedural Languages
1.1.2 The Object-Oriented
Approach
1.2 Characteristics of ObjectOriented Languages
Chapter Objective
To know the need of object

oriented programming.
To understand
characteristics of object
oriented programming
language.
117
Time Allotted
3 weeks

1.2.1
1.2.2
September 2012
Objects
Classes
CHAPTER 2
Object-Oriented Programming
Concepts
2.1 Data abstraction and Abstract
Data Types
2.2 Inheritance
2.3 Reusability
2.4 Class hierarchy
2.5 Abstract class
2.6 Polymorphism
2.7 Operator Overloading
CHAPTER 3
More on Object-Oriented
Programming
3.1 Events and Triggers
3.2 Data Streams
3.3 Introduction to Web
Programming
3.4 Web Pages and HTML
Applets
4 weeks
To understand ObjectOriented Programming

Concepts
To enable students to work
with pure Object-Oriented
Programming Language.
3 weeks
To understand Events and

Triggers.
To give students concept
about web programming.
CHAPTER 4
Object-Oriented Software
Development
4.1 Evolution of the Software
Development Processes
4.1.1 The Seat-of-the-Pants
Process
4.1.2 The Waterfall Process
4.1.3 Object-Oriented
Programming
4.1.4 Modern Processes
4.2 Use Case Modeling
4.2.1 Actors
4.2.2 Use Cases
4.2.3 Scenarios
4.2.4 Use Case Diagrams
4.2.5 Use Case Descriptions
4.2.6 From Use Cases to
Classes
4.3 The Programming Problem

4.3.1 Hand-Written Forms
4.3.2 Assumptions
4.4 The Elaboration Phase for the
LANDLORD Program
5 weeks
To provide a solid
foundation for developing
software using the objectoriented paradigm.
118

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
Actors
Use Cases
Use Case Descriptions
Scenarios
UML Activity
Diagrams
4.5 From Use Cases to Classes

4.5.1 Listing the Nouns
4.5.2 Refining the List
4.5.3 Discovering
Attributes
4.5.4 From Verbs to
Messages
4.5.5 Class Diagram
4.5.6 Sequence Diagrams
4.6 Writing the Code
4.6.1 The Header File
4.6.2 The .CPP Files
4.6.3 More Simplifications
4.7 Interacting with the Program
Literature
September 2012
Lecture supported by tutorial and

Programming exercises and mini-project.
Attendance (5%); Assignment (20%),
Chapter Quizzes (15%); Tests (20%); Final
Examination (40%)
attendance
Textbook:
Object Oriented Programming in C++,
Robert Lafore
References:
Programming with Objects: A
Comparative Presentation of ObjectOriented Programming With C++ and
Java, Avinash C. Kak
An Introduction to Object-Oriented
Programming with Java, C. Thomas Wu
Java with Object-Oriented Programming,
Paul S. Wang
119
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Computing : 3 Pre-requisites: Math-2023: Applied
(2,1,2)
Mathematics III (Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: III
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives & Competences The course aims:

to be Acquired
Familiarize students with components of computers
Define common terminologies used in programming
Explain the steps, tools and technical approaches
involved in program design
Use the techniques of program design to develop
programs that solve real life problems
Utilize advanced concepts of programming to provide
better solutions
Introduction
Contents
Hardware components of computers, Software
Components of computers
Program Development
Algorithm and Data, Flow Charts
C++ Programming Basics
Integrated Development Environment (IDE), Basic
Program Construction, Built-in Data Types,
Constants, Variables, Operators and Statements,
Type Conversions, Library Functions
Loops and Decisions
Loops, Decisions, Other Control Statements
Arrays and Strings
Single and Multidimensional Arrays, Strings
Structures and Enumerated Data Types
Functions
Simple Functions, Argument Passing, Overloaded
Functions, Inline Functions, Default Arguments
Pointers
Addresses and Pointers, Pointers, Arrays and
Strings, Memory Management,
Linked lists
Files
Graphics
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Chapter Objective
120
Time Allotted
1 week

Introduction
1.1. Hardware components of
computers
September 2012
Familiarize students with

components of computers
1.2. Software Components of

computers
CHAPTER 2
Problem solving using computers
2.1 Problem solving approach
2.2 Program development
2.3 Algorithm development
2.4 Expressing algorithm-flow
charts
2.5 Implementing algorithms programming languages
CHPTER 3
C++ Programming Basics
3.1 Integrated Development
Environment (IDE)
3.2 Basic Program Construction
3.3 Built-in Data Types
3.4 Constants
3.5 Variables
3.6 Operators and Statements
3.7 Type Conversions
3.8 Library Functions
CHAPTER 4
Loops and Decisions
4.1 Loops
4.2 Decisions
4.3 Other Control Statements
1 weeks
Apply problem solving steps

to solve real world
programming.
To develop flow charts for a
particular case.
Find a method of
implementing algorithms.
2 weeks
To get started with C++

programming languge.
To understand syntax and
semantics of C++
programming.
To apply library functions
combined with constants and
variables to produce output.
2 weeks
CHAPTER 5
Arrays and Strings
5.1 Single and Multidimensional
Arrays
5.2 Strings
CHAPTER 6
Functions
6.1 Simple Functions
6.2 Argument Passing
6.3 Overloaded Functions
6.4 Inline Functions
6.5 Default Arguments
CHAPTER 7
Pointers
7.1 Addresses and Pointers
7.2 Pointers
7.3 Arrays and Strings
7.4 Memory Management
To apply loops and decisions

to solve problems.
To Use control statements.
To apply arrays in C++ to

solve problems.
To work with strings.
2 weeks
To apply Functions in C++ to 2 weeks

solve problems.
To work with Overloaded &
Inline Functions.
2 weeks
To work with pointers

To manage memory
121

CHAPTER 8
Structures, Unions and
Enumerations
8.1 Structures
8.2 Arrays of Structures

8.3 Passing Structures to Functions
8.4 Structure Pointers
8.5 Arrays and Structures Within
Structures
8.6 Bit-Fields
8.7 Unions
8.8 Enumerations
CHAPTER 9
Files and Graphics
9.1 Files
9.2 Graphics
2 weeks
To work with Structures,
Unions and Enumerations
To pass structures to
functions
1 week
To understand files and
graphics

Assessment/Evaluation & Grading System
Literature
September 2012

Examination (40%)
attendance
Textbook:
Object Oriented Programming in C++,
Robert Lafore
References:
Programming in C and C++, Herbert
Schildt
Borland C++ Techniques and Utilities,
Kaare Christian
C++: How to program, H.M. Deitel and
P.J. Deitel
Problem Solving, Abstraction, and Design
Using C++ , Frank L. Friedman and Elliot
B. Koffman
122
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
11
Basics of Control Engineering
Module Electrical Engineering III enables students to understand
background in communication systems; analog and digital linear and nonlinear modulation and demodulation techniques; operational principles
and limitations of electrical and electronic control circuits; and design
advanced electronic circuits in communication and control of electrical
devices.
get a strong background in communication systems engineering
learn the different analog and digital linear and non-linear
modulation and demodulation techniques those are common to
many communication systems
Develop basic skills of utilizing mathematical tools needed to
analyze and design classical linear dynamic control systems.
Get real-world experience in control systems problems, design,
and implementation.
able to realize electronic systems using circuits such as Schmitt
trigger, sample and hold
able to make step time response measurements in position and
speed loops of DC / AC motors
able to design three input MUX and DEMUX operations on the
signals triangular, sine and square wave signals
Able to design and test Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog
converters using discrete components.
able to design and find the spectral response of Amplitude
Modulation circuit for DSB , DSB-SC
16
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
lecture
16*27=432
64
Course Number
ECEG-3112
ECEG-3111
ECEG-3113
Tutorial
Lab/pract
96
96
Course Name
Introduction Communication Systems
Introduction to Control Engineering
123
Home study
176
ECTS
5
5
6
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to
Pre-requisites:
Communication Systems : 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-2072: Applied Electronics II
ECEG-3082: Network Analysis and Synthesis
ECEG-3085: Probability and Random
Processes
ECEG-3113:
Electrical
Engineering Lab V (Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VI
Module: Basics of Control Engineering
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To give a strong background in communication

systems engineering.
To teach the different analog and digital linear and
non-linear modulation and demodulation techniques
those are common to many communication systems.
Short description of an analog communication system
Analysis of deterministic signals in frequency
domain
Signal transmission in base band
Linear distortion
Nonlinear distortion
Analog modulation systems
Analysis of linear modulations such as AM, DSB,
SSB
Linear modulation and demodulation techniques also
combined with FDM
Nonlinear modulation techniques such as PM and FM
Survey of sampling techniques for analog pulse
modulations such as PAM, PPM and PDM
Pulse modulation systems, PCM, DM, DPCM
FSK, PSK and ASK
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Electronic
Communication
1.1 The Importance of
Communications
1.2 Elements of
Communication
System
1.3 Communication
Chapter Objectives
Methodology
Define Modulation and Lecture(Gapped)and

Why it is necessary.
tutorial
Assignment
Name
the
main
elements of a typical
Communication
system.
124
Time
Allotted
2 Weeks
September 2012
Channels
1.4 Analogue and Digital
Types of
Communication
PART- I
CHAPTER 2
Amplitude Modulation
2.1 Amplitude Modulation
Principles
2.2 Modulation Index and
Percentage of Modulation
2.3 Sidebands and the
Frequency Domain
2.4 Amplitude Power
Distribution
2.5 Single Sideband
Communication
2.6 Noise in AM receivers
Recognize the AM Lectures supported

signal in the Time by Tutorial and
Domain.
Assignments;
Calculate the Sideband
Power in an AM wave.
State the benefits of
SSB over an AM
signal.
CHAPTER 3
Linear Modulation
Schemes
3.1 Types of Linear
Modulation
3.2 DSB-SC Modulation
3.3 SSB Modulation
3.4 VSB Modulation
Describe how better

communication
resource utilization is
achieved
using
Suppressed Carrier M,
Single Side Band, or
Vestigial. And analyze
the
corresponding
Mathematical
description
CHAPTER 4
Frequency Modulation
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Narrow band and
Wide band FM
4.3 Band Width of FM
Signals
4.4 Modulation and
Demodulation of FM
signals
4.5 FM Stereo
Multiplexing
4.6 Non Linear Effects in
FM Systems
4.7 The Super heterodyne
Receiver
Lecture + Tutorial
Make simple spectral and Assignments;
analysis of FM signal.
PART-II
CHAPTER 5
Pulse Modulation
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Sampling Process
3 Weeks
Lectures supported
by Tutorial and
Assignment
(Reading);
2 Weeks
3 Weeks
Distinguish b/n narrow

band FM and wide
band FM based on the
value of Modulation
index.
Describe the operation
of Super heterodyne
Receiver
Differentiate Analog
pulse modulation to
Digital
pulse
modulation.
125
Lectures supported
by Tutorial and
Assignment
(Reading);
3 Weeks

5.3 Pulse Amplitude
Modulation
5.4 Pulse Code
Modulation
5.6 Time Division
Multiplexing
5.7 Frequency Division
Multiplexing
5.7 Digital Multiplexers
September 2012
Calculate
Sampling
rate for PAM
Explain the process of
FDM, TDM and PCM
CHAPTER 6
Introduce the basic Lectures supported
2 Weeks
Introduction to Digital
methods of Digital by Tutorial and
Transmission, Pass band
Transmission.
Assignments
6.1 Introduction
6.1 Pass-band
Transmission Model
6.2 Phase Shift Keying
6.3 Frequency Shift
Keying
Lecture supported by tutorial, and assignment.
System
(40%)
Literature
Textbook:
Haykin: Communication Systems. (CH-2, 3,
4, 5, 6.)
References:
Taub and Schilling: Principles of
Louis E. Frenzel, Communication Electronics,
Principles and Applications. Third Edition
(CH-1,2,5)
126
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Control
Pre-requisites:
Engineering : 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-2081: Signal and Systems Analysis
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VI
Contact Hours (per week): 6
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Students will add to their knowledge-base in the

fundamentals of electrical engineering modeling and
design.
Students will develop basic skills of utilizing
mathematical tools needed to analyze and design
classical linear dynamic control systems.
Each student will get real-world experience in control
systems problems, design, and implementation.
Modeling and representation of Control Systems
Differential and difference equations of systems,
Lapalace transform Z transform, and transfer
function of control systems and system elements,
impulse response of linear systems, block diagrams,
signal flow graphs.
Time domain analysis of Control Systems
Performance Characteristics of feedback control
systems, robustness, the characteristic equation and
transient response, effect of derivative and integral
term in transient response, steady state errors,
discrete data control systems.
Frequency domain analysis
Polar plot, bode plot, magnitude versus phase plot,
relation between plots, Stability of linear control
systems (Routh-Hurwitz Criterion, Nyquist
Criterion, Stability of discrete data control
systems), Frequency response of feedback control
systems (Control specification in frequency
domain, Relative stability, Nichols chart).
Root-locus
Constructing root locus, Root loci and frequency
domain plots, root contours, root loci and discrete
data control systems.
Design of Controllers
Root locus method: Phase-lead compensation,
phase-lag compensation, lead-lag compensation.
Frequency response method: Phase-lead
compensation, phase-lag compensation, lead-lag
compensation.
Control System Components
127
September 2012
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction of Control Systems:
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Examples of Control systems
1.3 Closed-Loop Control Versus
open-Loop Control
1.4 Design of Control System s
CHAPTER 2
The Laplace Transform
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Laplace Transformation
2.3 Laplace Transformation
Theorems
2.4 Inverse Laplace
Transformation
2.5 Solving Linear, Time
invariant, Differential
Equation
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
To introduce students about control 1 weeks
system, identify Control systems,
Differentiate Open & Closed loop
systems.
Finally the students should know the
Design of Control systems
CHAPTER 3
Mathematical Modeling of
Dynamic System
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Transfer Function and
Impulse-Response Function
3.3 Block Diagrams
3.4 Mechanical, Electrical,
Liquid level and thermal
Systems
3.5 Signal Flow graph
To enable the students to represent 2 weeks

different
control
systems
like
Mechanical & Electrical Systems using
Mathematical equation that is system
modeling.
CHAPTER 4
Time Domain Analysis:
To Analyze Control Systems in time 3 weeks

domain.
4.1 introduction
4.2 First- Order System
4.3 Second Order System
4.4 Transient Response

Analysis
To enable the students to apply the 1 weeks

Laplace Transform & Inverse Laplace
transform
Using Laplace Transform the students
will be able to solve Linear ,Time
invariant ,Differential Equation
To represent Control Systems using

Block Diagrams & Signal flow graph.
To Describe the Effects of Integral and

Derivatives of Control Actions on
system performance
The students will be able to determine
whether the given Control system is
Stable or not using Rouths stability
Criterion, steady state errors
4.4 Effects
of Integral and
Derivatives Control Actions
on system performance
4.6 steady state errors

4.7 Higher-Order systems
4.8 Rouths Stability criterion
128
September 2012
CHAPTER 5
Root Locus Analysis
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Root-Locus Plots
5.3 General Rules for
Constructing Root Loci
5.4 Roots Locus Analysis of
Control system
5.5 Root Contour plots
CHAPTER 6
Frequency Response:
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Bode Diagrams
6.3 Polar plots
6.4 Nyquist Stability Criterion
6.5 Stability Analysis
6.6 Relative stability
6.7 Closed Loop Frequency
Response
6.8 Nichols chart
To Know about construction of Root

Loci (Root-Locus plot) and using the
Root Locus plot the students able to
analysis different control systems.
CHAPTER 7
7.1 Design Of Controllers
7.2 Root locus method:
- Phase-lead compensation
- phase-lag compensation
- lead-lag compensation
7.3 Frequency response method:
- Phase-lead compensation
- phase-lag compensation
- lead-lag compensation
To design the control system using

Root locus method & Frequency
response method of Phase-lead, phaselag & lead-lag compensation.
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment and laboratory

exercises
Textbook:
Modern Control Engineering by Katsuhiko Ogata
References:
Girma Mulisa: Introduction to Control Engineering
Feedback Control system analysis and synthesis by
John J. D Azzo and Houpis,
Control System Engineering by I.J. Nagrath and
Gopal
Literature
2 weeks
The students will be able to Analyze 3 weeks

Control Systems in Frequency domain
using Bode Plots and Polar plots.
The students should able to draw Polar
plot, Bode Diagram & Nichols Chart.
Enable the students to determine
whether the given Control system is
Stable or not using Nyquist stability
Criterion and Relative stability.
129
3 weeks
September 2012

Wolaita sSodo University, College of Engineering
Course Title: Electrical Engineering Lab V: Pre-requisites:
2 (0,0,6)
ECEG-3092: Electrical Engineering Lab IV
ECEG-3111: Introduction to Control
Engineering (Co-requisite)
ECEG-3112: Introduction to Communication
Systems (Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: VI
Lecturer: TBA N.N.
to be Acquired
Contents

To be able to realize electronic systems using

circuits such as Schmitt trigger, sample and hold
To be able to make step time response measurements
in position and speed loops of DC / AC motors
Three input MUX and DEMUX operations on the
signals triangular, sine and square wave signals
To be able to design and test Analog to Digital and
Digital to Analog converters using discrete
components.
To be able to design and find the spectral response of
Amplitude Modulation circuit for DSB , DSB-SC
Measurement of hysteresis in a Schmitt trigger
circuit
Hook up and testing digital circuits:-- Adder,
counter, MUX, DeMUX
To design and construct ADC / DAC circuits
Amplitude Modulation for DSB and DSBSC,
Spectral response
Speed control of DC motor
Position control using incremental resolver
Speed control of AC motor
Proportional, PI, PID control of feed back control
systems
100% lab attendance
130
September 2012
Electronic Communication Focus Modules and Courses

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
12
Elective
During the courses of this module the graduate students will learn:
Data Structures
- Overview of Data Structures and Operations in Data Structures
- Arrays: Memory Allocation; Operations in Arrays
Linked Lists: Memory Allocation; Operations in Linked Lists;
Variation of Link Circular, Doubly-Linked,
- Stacks: definition, Implementation, Application and Queues:
- Trees: Definition and Implementation; Type of Trees:, Binary
Search, Heap, ; Application of Trees
- Graphs: Definition and Implementation; Application of Graphs
Sorting and Searching: Sorting Algorithms; Searching Algorithms
OR
Micro electronics:
Understand basic functions and concepts of microelectronic devices
and circuits;
- Learn the function of microelectronic systems,
- Adopt knowledge in variety of applications.
- Get familiar and apply VLSI concepts, namely the design,
simulation and test of integrated circuits.
- Learn and apply a hardware description language.
- Be able to use mathematical methods in system description and
analysis
- Apply circuit analysis models for analog and mixed-mode
simulation
- Perform circuit analysis of CMOS digital circuits, including logic
components and their interconnections.
- Get familiar with CAD tools and use them in project work to
Realize small sized integrated circuits.
- Design of digital integrated circuit with medium complexity using
appropriate synthesis tools and implementation of them on FPGA
technology.
- Understand market requirements and impact on design cycles.
Total ECTS of the
5
131

module
Time allocated
5*27=135
OR
Time allocated
5*27=135
Course Number
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4121
Lecture
32
Tutorial
16
Lecture
32
September 2012
Lab/pract.
32
Tutorial
Lab/pract.
48
0
Course Name
Data Structures
132
Home study
55
Home study
55
ECTS
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Data Structures : 3 (2,1,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECE-3103: Object-Oriented Programming
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Elective
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents
To provide profound knowledge of the various data

structures together with their implementation and
associated operations.
To make the student able to use existing data structures
and to create a new one.
Overview of Data Structures
Data Structures and Operations in Data Structures
Arrays
Memory Allocation; Operations in Arrays
Linked Lists
Memory Allocation; Operations in Linked Lists;
Variation of Linked Lists: Circular, Doubly-Linked
Stacks and Queues
Stacks: Definition, Implementation, and Application;
Queues: Definition, Implementation, and Application
Trees
Definition and Implementation; Type of Trees: Binary,
Binary Search, Heap, Application of Trees
Graphs
Definition and Implementation; Application of Graphs
Sorting and Searching Sorting Algorithms; Searching
Algorithms
133
September 2012
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
1.1.Introduction to data structures
and operations
1.2.Data Structure
1.3.Operations in Data Structures
CHAPTER 2
Arrays
2.1.Introduction
2.2.Memory Allocation in arrays
2.3.Operations in Arrays
CHAPTER 3
Linked Lists
3.1. Introduction to linked lists
3.2. Memory Allocation
3.3. Operations in Linked Lists
3.4. Variation of Linked Lists
3.4.1. Circular Linked lists
3.4.2. Doubly Linked lists
CHAPTER 4
Stacks and Queues
4.1.Introduction
4.2.Stacks:
4.2.1. Definition and description of stacks
4.2.2. Implementation of stacks
4.2.3. Application of stacks
4.3.Queues
4.3.1. Definition and description of queues
4.3.2. Implementation of queues
4.3.3. Application of queues
CHAPTER 5
Trees
5.1.Introduction to trees
5.2.Definition of trees
5.3.Implementation of trees
5.4.Type of Trees
5.4.1. Binary
5.4.2. Binary Search
5.4.3. Heap
5.5.Application of Trees
5.6. Trees and external storage
5.7.Red-Black trees
CHAPTER 6
Graphs
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
1 week
Provide overview of Data

structures and operations.
2 weeks
Apply the use of arrays in
memory allocation and explain
how it works.
3 weeks
Introduce about linked lists.
Explain how linked lists operate
and apply it in data structures in
general.
3 weeks
Provide the basics of Stacks and
Queues in Data Structures
Applications of
queues and stacks
Implementations of
stacks and Queues.
Operation of stacks
and queues
3 weeks
Define trees with respect to
Data Structures.
Differentiate between types of
trees and their
Implementation
Application
3 weeks
To implement and apply
134

6.1.Introduction
6.2.Definition and description
6.3.Implementation of graphs
6.4.Application of Graphs
6.5.Sorting and Searching Algorithms
6.5.1. Sorting algorithms
6.5.2. Advanced sorting
6.5.3. Shell sort
6.5.4. Insertion sort: Too many copies
6.5.5. N-sorting
6.5.6. Searching Algorithms
6.6.Weighted graphs
CHAPTER 7
The recursive algorithm
7.1. Introduction
7.2. Eliminating recursion
7.3. Recursions and stacks
7.4. Simulating a recursive method
Literature
September 2012
Graphs, and
Explain searching and
sorting algorithms
To
implement
searching and sorting
algorithms
.
1 Week
Convey the idea of recursive
algorithm.
Apply Recursions in stacks.
Simulate a recursive method
Lectures, tutorials, lab exercises, project, etc
Minimum Attendance 75 %
Textbook:
..
References:
Data Structures in C and C++, by Yedidyah
Langsam, Moshe J. Augenstein, Aaron M.
Tanenbaum
Theory and Problems of Data Structures, Seymour
Lipschutz, Schaums's outline series
135
September 2012

Course Title: Microelectronic Devices and
Pre-requisites:
Circuits: 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-3053: Electrical Materials and
Technology
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Elective
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &

Contents

Literature
The course aims to make the students:

Understand the basic concepts realization of
microelectronic devices and circuits;
Study cases of microelectronic systems;
Be able to effectively participate in microelectronic
applications, selection, modification, purchase and
production to meet the market / social demands
Course Description:
Modeling of microelectronic devices, basic
microelectronic circuit analysis and design,
physical electronics of semiconductor junction
and MOS devices, relation of electrical behavior
to internal physical processes, development of
circuit models, understanding and limitations of
various models
Course Outline:
Boltzmann diode model
Design of rectifier circuit and computer aided
analysis
NMOS and PMOS transistor operating principle,
modeling MOS transistor, design of CMOS
inverter and simulation
BJT models,
Advantages and limitations of the simulation
models
(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Computer Simulation of electronic circuits, by
R. Raghuram;
Microcomputer - Aided Analysis of Electronic
Circuits by M.Bialko
Data sheets and SPICE models of Texas
Instruments
136
September 2012
Microelectronics: Digital and Analog Circuits

and Systems J. Millman McGraw Hill,1979
137
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
13
Instrumentation and Interfacing
Module Instrumentation and Interfacing enables students to build the
knowledge on various types of Instruments in terms of their
operations/application, also enables to learn programming of
microcomputer and its Interfacing techniques.
BSc students can build profound knowledge on the basic operational
principles and limitations of electrical and electronic instruments. To
analyze and compare commercial instruments and design similar
systems under given constraints.
Similarly this module enables to build knowledge on microcomputer
CPU like 8086 in terms of its architecture, programming model,
memory mapping, interfacing Peripherals, PIC, etc.
During the courses of this module the graduate students will learn
following:
Characteristics on Instrumentation :
- General Principles: Basic Concepts of Measurement;
Performance
Characteristics Static and Dynamic; Noise and Interference in
Instrumentations
- Sensors and Applications: Passive Sensors: Resistive, Capacitive,
Inductive; Active Sensors and Applications; Discrete Output
Sensors: Shaft Encoders
- Signal Conditioning and Conversion: Deflection Bridges,
Amplifiers
and Attenuators, Oscillators and Filters
- Output Presentation: Indicators: Pointer-Scale, Alphanumeric,
Graphical; Recorders: Graphical, Magnetic, Semiconductor.
Characteristics on Microcomputer:
- 8086 CPU Architecture
- Instruction Set; 3.CPU Hardware design & single board
computer
- Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI) 8255A
- Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIT).
- USART(Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter) 8251A
module
Time allocated
Lecture
Tutorial
Lab/pract
Home study
10*27=270
64
32
64
110
Course Number
Course Name
ECTS
ECEG-4132
5
ECEG-4131
5
138
September 2012

Pre-requisites:
Instrumentation : 3 (2,1,2)
Engineering
Systems
ECEG-3102: Computer Architecture and
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Instrumentation and Interfacing
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents
To introduce the basic operational principles and

limitations of electrical and electronic instruments
To analyze and compare commercial instruments
and design similar systems under given constraints.
General Principles of Instrumentation, Sensors and
Applications, Signal Conditioning Circuits, Signal
Conversion Elements, Output Presentation. .
General Principles
Basic Concepts of Measurement; Performance
Characteristics Static and Dynamic; Noise
and Interference in Instrumentations
Sensors and Applications
Passive Sensors: Resistive, Capacitive,
Inductive; Active Sensors and Applications;
Discrete Output Sensors: Shaft Encoders
Signal Conditioning and Conversion
Deflection Bridges, Amplifiers and Attenuators,
Oscillators and Filters
Output Presentation
Indicators: Pointer-Scale, Alphanumeric,
Graphical; Recorders: Graphical, Magnetic,
Semiconductor
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Measurements and Error
1.1 Definitions
1.2Accuracy and precision
1.3 Significant Figures
1.4 Types of Error
1.5 Statistical Analysis
1.6 Probability of Errors
1.7 Limiting Errors
Chapter Objective
Time
Allotted
To introduce different types of errors, 1 week
Significant figures and Statistical
Analysis as well as Probability of
Errors
139

CHAPTER 2
Direct Current Indicating
Instruments
2.1 Suspension Galvanometer
2.2 Torque and Deflection of the
Galvanometer
2.3 Permanent .Magnet moving
coil mechanism (PMMC)
2.4 Galvanometer Sensitivity
2.5 DC Ammeters
2.6 DC Voltmeters
2.7 Voltmeter Sensitivity
2.8 Voltmeter- Ammeter method
2.9 Series type Ohmmeter
2.10 Shunt type Ohmmeter
2.11 Multimeter or VOM
2.12 Calibration of Dc
Instruments
CHAPTER 3
Alternating Current Indicating
Instruments
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Electrodynamometer
3.3Moving Iron Instruments
3.4 Rectifier Type instruments
3.5Thermoinstruments
3.6 Electrostatic Voltmeter
3.7 Electrodynamometers in power
Measurements
3.8 Watt-hour meter
3.9 Power Factor Meters
3.10 Frequency Meters
3.11 Instrument Transformers
CHAPTER 4
Transducers
4.1 Classification of Transducers
4.2 Selecting a transducer
4.3 Strain Gages
4.4 Displacement Transducers
4.5 Temperature Measurements
4.6 Photosensitive Devices
4.7 Magnetic Measurements
CHAPTER 5
Analog and Digital Data Acquisition
systems
5.1 Instrumentation Systems
5.2 Magnetic Tape Recorders
5.3 Digital to-Analog conversion
5.4 Analog to- Digital conversion
To
understand
application
of
Instruments.
September 2012
principles
and 4 weeks
DC
indicating
To design different types of multimeter and calibrate DC instruments.
4 weeks
Describe the operating principles and
application
of
AC
indicating
Instruments such as
Electrodynamometer
Thermo-instruments
Electrostatic Voltmeter
Instrument Transformers
3 weeks
Differentiate b/n the different type of
transducers and their application.
State the principle of operations and
applications of
Displacement transducers
Temperature transducers
2 weeks
Describe the operation of Magnetic
tape recorders.
Understand how DAC and ADC are
working.
140

5.5 Multiplexing
5.6 Spatial Encoders
CHAPTER 6
Oscilloscopes
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Basic CRO operation
6.3 Cathode Ray tube (CRT)
6.4 Vertical Deflection System
6.5 Delay line
6.6 Horizontal Deflection System
Literature
September 2012
1 week
To introduce about the basic operation
of CRO and CRT.
About the horizontal deflection
About the Vertical deflection
Lectures supported by tutorials and practical

(40%)
75% lecture, 100% laboratory
Textbook:
William David Cooper, Electronic instrumentation
and Measurement Techniques.
References:
A.K. Gosh, Electronic Instrumentation
Doeblin, Principles of Instrumentation
B.E. Jones, Instrumentation Measurement and
Feedback
141
September 2012

Course Title: Microcomputers and
Pre-requisites:
Interfacing: 3(2,1,2)
ECE-3102: Computer Architecture and
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents
This course is designed to impart in-depth knowledge

in the design, programming and organization of
microcomputers and interfacing circuits. This involves
the study of interfacing peripheral chips (Programming
and Signals). This course completely covers the
popular Intel P 8086, which would be a steppingstone for learning the X 86 families of microprocessors.
At the end of the course the students would be capable
of:
Developing applications using Assembly/C/C++
Language Programming and to design simple or
complex systems using the Intel family of
microprocessors.
Designing programmable peripheral chips-based
microcomputer systems.
Understanding latest peripheral chip technologies.
Writing efficient programs for data transfer between
heterogeneous environments.
Developing software for interfacing various
peripherals to PC.
Understanding PC based interfacing concepts.
Developing
Interfacing
Applications
using
Centronic and COM ports
Fundamentals
of
Microprocessors
and
Microcomputers
8086 Microcomputer Architecture
Register level organization; Memory organization;
Bus systems; Peripheral hardware organization
Programming Microcomputers
8086 Instruction Set; Assembly language
programming: Stacks, Subroutines, Input/output,
Exception and Interrupt
Interfacing Fundamentals
Programmable
Interrupt
Controller
(PIC);
Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI); Universal
Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
(USART); Programmable Interval Timer (PIT)
Interfacing Hardware to Personal Computers.
Designing Microprocessors
Course Outline
142

Contents
CHAPTER 1
An Introduction To
Microprocessor And Computer
1.1 A Historical Background
1.2 The Microprocessor Age
1.3 Pentium Evolution
1.4 The Microprocessor-Based
Personal computer System
1.5 The Microprocessor
September 2012
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
At the end of this chapter
2 week
students are able
To get history of
Microprocessor and
Computer.
To get an Introduction to
Microprocessor and
Computer.
CHAPTER 2
2.1
8086
Architecture

Microcomputer students are able
To explore the 8086
microcomputer architecture,
2.3 Register level organization
this would be a steppingstone for learning the X 86
2.4 Memory organization
families of microprocessors.
2.5 Bus systems
To know bus systems and
2.6 Peripheral hardware
differentiate the different bus
organization
systems and their function.
3 week
CHAPTER 3
3.1 8086 Instruction Set
3.2 Assembly language
programming
3.3 Stacks
3.4 Subroutines
3.5 Input /Output
3.6 Interrupts

students are able
Developing applications using
Assembly/C/C++ Language
Programming and to design
simple or complex systems
using the Intel family of
microprocessors.
Writing efficient programs for
data transfer between
3 week
CHAPTER 4
Interfacing
4.1 Programmable Interrupt
Controller (PIC)
4.2 Programmable Peripheral
Interface (PPI)
4.3 Universal Synchronous

students are able
Developing software for
interfacing various peripherals
to PC.
Understanding PC based
interfacing concepts.
143
4 week
September 2012
Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter (USART)
4.4 Programmable Interval Timer
(PIT)
4.5 Interfacing Hardware to
Personal Computers.
Developing Interfacing
Applications using Centronic
and COM ports
CHAPTER 5
At the end of this chapter 3 week

students are able
to design simple or complex
systems using the Intel
family of microprocessors

Literature

Examination (40%)
attendance
Textbook:
References:
Douglas V Hall, Microprocessors and
Interfacing-Programming and Hardware,
2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, NewDelhi2002.
Ramesh S Gaonkar, Microprocessor
Programming and Interfacing using 8085,
Penram Publications, 4th Edition, 2003
A.K.Ray, K.M.Bhurchandy, Intel
Microprocessors-Architecture,
Programming and Interfacing, McGrawHill International Edition, 2004
144
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
14
Communication System and Network
Module Communication System and Network enables the student to
build the knowledge on the working principles/ concepts/ technologies
of communication systems, communication network and
telecommunication system. BSc graduates can build profound
knowledge of random process in general and noise in particular, the
performance of receivers in the presence of noise, networking concepts,
technologies and terminologies, most popular telecommunication
networks and their related standardization work.
During the courses of this module the graduate students will learn:
Communication System introduces students to random process in
general and noise in particular and enable students to analyze the
performance of receivers in the presence of noise, enable the student
to design optimum receivers and introduce them to the theory of
information and coding.
.
Data Comm. & Computer Networks introduce students to
networking concepts, technologies and terminologies also provide
basic computer communication and networking knowledge and the
foundations for further courses dealing with different aspects of
networking.
Telecommunication Networks provide knowledge to inspect and
summarize the major features of the today's most popular
telecommunication networks as well as the forthcoming ones. It also
familiarize to the related standardization work established by various
worldwide standardization bodies.
Switching and Intelligent network
Understand and application Intelligent Network systems.
Understand the concept of modern switching used in Integrated
Service Digital Network.

module
Time allocated
Lecture
20*27=540
144
Course Number
ECEG-4141
ECEG-4142
ECEG-5143
ECEG-5144
Tutorial
Lab/pract
Home study
144
16
236
Course Name
Data Communication & Computer Networks
145
ECTS
5
5
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Communication Systems 3 (2
Pre-requisites:
3 0)
Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Communication System and
Network
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

To understand the principles/concepts of the
noise and the theory of information and coding.
To apply the knowledge of random process in
general and noise in particular in the context of
Communication Systems.
To have sound understanding of the analysis of
the performance of receivers in the presence of
noise.
On completion of the course students are expected :
To develop alternative approaches to
modify/redesign of sub-system of
Communication System.
To enable the student to design optimum
receivers.
Noise in receiver
Review of Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes
Mathematical Representation of Noise
Noise in Amplitude Modulation Systems
Noise in Frequency Modulation Systems.
Thresholds in Frequency Modulation Systems
Noise in PCM and DM
Pulse / Digital-Modulation Systems
Receiver
Optimum Receivers design
Channel Equalization
Optimum Filter Design
Information Theory/Coding
Introduction to Information Theory
Entropy, Mutual Information
Source Coding
Introduction to channel coding
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objectives
146
Time Allotted

CHAPTER-1
Spectral Analysis
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Fourier Series
Examples of Fourier
Series
1.3 Sampling Function
1.4 Linear System Response
1.5 Normalized Power
1.6 Power Spectral Density
1.7 Fourier Transform
1.8 Convolution
1.9 Correlation
Cross Correlation
Auto Correlation
CHAPTER- 2
Random Variables and Process
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Probability
2.3 Random Process
2.4 PSD of Random Sequences
CHAPTER-3
Mathematical Representation of
Noise
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Sources of Noise
3.3 Types of Noise
White Noise
Colored Noise
CHAPTER-4
Noise in Amplitude Modulation
Systems
4.1 Introduction
receivers
4.3 Advantage of SuperHeterodyne Principle
4.4 Single-Sideband Suppressed
Carrier
Signal Power
Noise Power
4.5 Double Sideband Suppressed
Carrier
Signal Power
Noise Power
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
September 2012
2 Weeks
To review the basics of Fourier

series and Fourier Transform.
Analyze the power Spectral
density, Cross Correlation, and
Auto Correlation properties.
1 Week
To Review the properties of
random variables and random
processes.
2 Weeks
To represent different kinds/Types
of noise mathematically.
3 weeks
Analyze the effect of noise in
Amplitude modulation.
Calculate the signal power and
noise power in both SSB-SC and
DSB-SC and also find the SNR.
4.6 Double Sideband With Carrier

4.7 Square-Law Demodulation
4.8 Envelop Demodulation
CHAPTER-4
3 Weeks
147

Noise in Frequency Modulation
4.1 Introduction
4.2 FM Demodulator
4.3
September 2012
Analyze mathematically the

effects of noise in Frequency
modulation.
Calculate the SNR in an FM
signal.
CHAPTER -5
Noise in Pulse Code Modulation
and Delta Modulation
5.1 Introduction
5.2 PCM Transmission
2 Weeks
CHAPTER-6
Optimum Receivers
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Optimum Receiver Design
6.3 Channel Equalization
6.4 Optimum Filter Design
2 Weeks
CHAPTER-7
Fundamentals in Information
Theory
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Uncertainty, Information, and
Entropy
7.3 Source Coding Theorem
7.4 Data Compaction
7.5 Mutual Information
7.6 Channel capacity
7.7 Channel Coding Theorem
Literature
Design Optimum Receivers and

Optimum Filters for
Communication Receivers.
To introduce entropy as a basic

measure of Information
2 Weeks
State Mutual Information and its

relation to the capacity of Channel.
Apply Different Channel and
Source Coding Theorems
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment

(Reading+ Chapter Project).
(40%)
Textbook:
Communication Systems, 2nd and 3rd edition
Digital and Analog Communication Systems
(6th Edition) by Leon W. Couch
Modern Digital and Analog Communications
Systems(The Oxford Series in Electrical and
Computer Engineering) by B.P. Lathi
References:
Simon Haykin: Communication System, 4th
Edition.
John G Proakis: Digital CommunicationFull
bibliographic citation; sources not older than
5 years (older only in very exceptional cases)
Journals & Magazines: Internet browsing
148
September 2012

Course Title: Data Communication and
Pre-requisites:
Computer Networks : 3 (3,1,1)
Organization
Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Network
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents
To introduce students to networking concepts,

technologies and terminologies.
To provide basic computer communication and
networking knowledge and lay the foundations for
further courses dealing with different aspects of
networking.
Model for data communication; protocols and
architectures OSI and TCP/IP; issues related to data
transmission-encoding, multiplexing, error and flow
controls; Local Area networks - technology, components
and topology; Internetworking with TCP/IP, IP
Addressing and Network Applications; Routing,
Switching and WAN technologies
Introduction: Concept of Communication,
Communication Model
Protocols and Architectures: Protocol
Characteristics, Implementation of protocols, OSIISO 7 Layer, TCP/IP
Data Encoding & Transmission: Digital and Analog
Signals, Transmission Media, Encoding Techniques,
Transmission Impairments
DLC and Multiplexing: Error Detection and Control,
Flow Control, Multiplexing
LAN technologies: ALOHA, Ethernet, Ethernet
Standards, Token Ring
LAN and Its Components: LAN Topology,
Repeaters/Hubs, Bridges/Switches, Routers
Internetworking: Internetworking concepts
Intranet, Extranet, Internet, Internetworking with
TCP/IP- IP Addressing, Subnetting, Masking,
Network Applications Web, Mail, DNS, DHCP
Switching and Routing: Circuit Switching, Circuit
switching application, Packet Switching - Virtual
Packet Switching, Datagram Packet Switching,
Packet Switching application
Routing in Switched Networks: Introduction to
Routing, Graph Theory - Dijkstra Algorithm,
149
September 2012
Bellman-Ford Algorithm, Routing Protocols

Distance Vector, Link State
WAN technologies: ISDN, X.25, Frame Relay,
ATM
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1.1 A Communications Model
1.2 Data Communications
Networking
CHAPTER 2
Protocols and Architectures
2.1 Protocol Characteristics
2.2 Implementation of protocols
2.3 OSI-ISO 7 Layer
2.4 TCP/IP
CHAPTER 3
Data Transmission & Encoding
2.1 Concepts and Terminology
2.2 Analog and Digital Data
Transmission
2.3 Transmission Impairments
2.4 Transmission media
2.4.1 Guided Transmission
Media
2.4.2 Wireless Transmission
2.5 Data Encoding
2.5.1 Digital Data, Digital
Signals
2.5.2 Digital Data, Analog
Signals
2.5.3 Analog Data, Digital
Signals
2.5.4 Analog Data, Analog
Signals
2.5.5 Spread Spectrum
CHAPTER 4
Data Link Control and
Multiplexing
4.1 Data Link Control
4.1.1
Flow Control
4.1.2
Error Detection
4.1.3
Error Control
4.1.4
High-Level Data Link
Control (HDLC)
4.1.5
Other Data Link Control
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
At the end of this chapter 1week
students are able
Study the different types of
modeling communication.
To have an introduction to
data communications and
networking.
students are able
To introduce protocols.
To understand the
importance of layered
approach and understand the
OSI reference model.
Understand the TCP/IP
2weeks
students are able
To differentiate between
Analog and Digital Data
Transmission.
To understand the different
types of transmission media.
Discuss about data encoding
techniques.
2 weeks
students are able
To explore the different error
detection, Flow Control &
Error Control methods.
To operate with data link
control protocols.
To differentiate between the
different types of
150

Protocols
September 2012
Multiplexing.
4.2 Multiplexing
4.2.1
Frequency-Division
Multiplexing
4.2.2
Synchronous TimeDivision Multiplexing
4.2.3
Statistical TimeDivision Multiplexing
CHAPTER 5
Local Area Network (LAN)
5.1 LAN Topology
5.2 LAN technologies
5.2.1 ALOHA
5.2.2 Ethernet
5.2.3 Ethernet Standards
5.2.4 Token Ring
5.3 LAN Components
5.3.1 Repeaters/Hubs
5.3.2 Bridges/Switches
5.3.3 Routers
CHAPTER 6
Internetworking
6.1 Internetworking concepts
6.1.1 Intranet
6.1.2 Extranet
6.1.3 Internet
6.2 Internetworking with TCP/IP
6.2.1 IP Addressing
6.2.2 Subnetting
6.2.3 Masking
6.3 Network Applications
6.3.1 Web
6.3.2 Mail
6.3.3 DNS
6.3.4 DHCP
CHAPTER 7
Switching
7.1 Circuit Switching
7.2 Circuit switching application
7.3 Packet Switching
7.3.1 Virtual Packet
Switching
7.3.2 Datagram Packet
Switching
7.4 Packet Switching application
At the end of this chapter 2 weeks

students are able
To explain how LAN
technologies like ALOHA,
Ethernet, and Token Ring
Operate.
To work with
Repeaters/Hubs,
Bridges/Switches and
Routers.

students are able
To get knowledge about
Internetworking concepts.
Define Internetworking with
TCP/IP.
To work with IP Addressing
Subnetting.
Operate with Network
Applications like Web Mail,
DNS, and DHCP.

students are able
Circuit switching and Packet
Switching.
To analyze Circuit switching
application.
To Analyze Packet switching
application.
151

CHAPTER 8
Routing in Switched Networks
8.1 Introduction to Routing
8.2 Graph Theory
8.2.1 Dijkstra Algorithm
8.2.2 Bellman-Ford
Algorithm
8.3 Routing Protocols
September 2012

students are able
routing and routing protocol.
Work with Dijkstra
Algorithm and Bellman-Ford
Algorithm
.
CHAPTER 9
WAN technologies
9.1 ISDN
9.2 X.25
9.3 Frame Relay
9.4 ATM
Laboratory Exercise

Literature

students are able
To get an introduction to
WAN technologies.
Network Components - Interface Card and

Cables; Hardware and Software Installation
of Simple Type Network Systems; Protocol
Analysis using Software Tools.
Examination (40%)
attendance
Textbook:
William Stallings: Data & Computer
Communications
References:
Andrew S.Tanenbaum: Computer
Networks,
152

Course Title: Telecommunication Networks: Pre-requisites:
3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-4141: Communication Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Network
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

The course aims is:

To introduce the students to the principles/concepts
of technologies and their applications of
To inspect and summarize the major features of the
today's most popular telecommunication networks as
well as the forthcoming ones
To get oneself familiar to the related standardization
work
established
by
ITU
(International
Telecommunications Union), ETSI (European
Telecommunications Standards Institute) and various
other worldwide standardization bodies.
The students will have a sound understanding of the
Public Switched Telephone Network, ISDN and
SDH, GSM and CDMA Mobile Networks and their
implications.
The students will be able to develop realistic
telecommunication networking.
The students will be able to develop alternative
approaches to existing networking.
History and evolution of telecommunication
networks
Introduction to digital telecom transmission and
applications; overview of SDH, PDH, SONET and
ATM
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Local Area Radio Networks
Local Loop Access
Public Land Mobile Networks
Introduction to GSM and CDMA
Introduction to Digital Subscriber Line Technologies;
DSL, ADSL, HDSL, SDSL, VDSL
Overview of packet-switched networks
Digital Subscriber Line technologies.
(40%)
151

Literature
September 2012
Textbook:
References:
T. Saadawi: Fundamentals of
Telecommunication Networks, John Wiley &
Sons (1994)
M. P. Clark: Networks and
Telecommunications, John Wiley & Sons
(1991)
R. L. Freeman: Telecommunication System
Engineering, John Wiley & Sons (1991)
A. Leon-Garcia and Indra Widjaja:
Communication Networks: Fundamental
Concepts and Key Architectures, 2nd edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2004.
Journals & Magazines Internet browsing
152
September 2012

Course Title: Switching and Intelligent
Pre-requisites: ECEG-5143:
Network: 2(1,3,0)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: X
Network
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents
Gain knowledge and understanding of the working

principles of different types of Switching.
Understand and application Intelligent Network
systems.
Understand the concept of modern switching used in
Integrated Service Digital Network.
Gain insight into principles of various digital
switching, like packet switching and introduction to
advances in switching.
To be able to identify and understand the
application, operation and maintenance of these
digital switching..
Introduction to Switching function.
Background, basic principle of switching, circuit;
Switching and packet switching.
Space Division switching
Multiple stage switching, blocking probabilities,
folded four wire switches.
Time Division Switching Analog Time division
switching, Digital Time Division switching.
Two-dimensional Switching
STS switching, TST switching and STN switching.
Introduction to advances in switching
Shared-Memory Fast Packet switches;
Shared-Medium Switches;
Fast-Packet Switches;
Space-Division Fast Packet Switches
Introduction to Intelligent Network
Driving Forces behind the IN; Overview of IN IN
Architecture
Call Control; Various Service functions (Creation,
Service Control, Service; Data, Management,
Resource, Switching functions).
Benefits of IN N11 access service, ADOB,
Command routing, Call gate, Personal access,
Calling party pays, PNS, MCS, and PBX extend
service.
153
September 2012
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Switching function.
1. Back ground of switching
1.1.Basic principle of switching
1.2.Switching and signaling
1.3.Types of switching
1.3.1. circuit switching
1.3.2. message switching
1.3.3. packet switching
Chapter Objective
At the end of this
chapter, students are
be
able
to
understand
what
switching is,
Basic principles of
different types of
switching
i.e.
circuit, message and
packet switching.
Describe Principles
of operation of
signaling
and
switching
CHAPTER 2
At the end of this
Circuit switching
2. introduction
be able to
2.1.Space Division switching
understand what
2.1.1. Multiple stage switching
circuit switching is
2.1.2. blocking probabilities
and its detail,
2.1.3. Folded four wire switches.
Space and time
2.1.4. Signaling to the Exchange
division switching
from the Telephone.
and
2.1.5. Time Division Switching
Two dimensional
2.1.5.1.Analog Time division
switching.
2.1.5.2.Digital Time Division
Designing time
switching
division and space
2.2.Two-dimensional Switching
division switching
2.2.1. STS switching
Designing two2.2.2. TST switching
dimensional
2.2.3. STN switching
switching i.e.
designing STS, TST,
and STN switching
Blocking
probabilities
CHAPTER 3
At the end of this
Introduction to advances in switching
3.1. Shared-Memory Fast Packet
be
able
to
switches
understand what
3.2. Shared-Medium Switches
3.3. Fast-Packet Switches
3.4. Space-Division Fast Packet
Switches
CHAPTER 4
Introduction to Intelligent Network
4.1.What is IN?
4.2.Driving Forces behind the IN
4.3.Overview of IN
154
At the end of this

be able to
understand what
intelligent Network
Time Allotted
1 week
4weeks
3 weeks
3 weeks

4.4.IN Architecture
CHAPTER 5
Call Control
5.1. Introduction
5.2. Various Service functions
5.2.1. Creation
5.2.2. Service Control
5.2.3. Service
5.2.4. Data
5.2.5. Management
5.2.6. Resource,
5.2.7. Switching functions
5.3. Benefits of IN N11 access service
5.4. ADOB
5.5. Command routing
5.6. Call gate
5.7. Personal access
5.8. Calling party pays
5.9. PNS
5.10.
MCS
5.11.
PBX extended service.
Literature
September 2012
is and
IN architecture.
At the end of this
4 weeks
be able to
understand what call
control is and
various service
functions
benefits of IN N11
command routing
PBX extends service

Examination (40%)
Textbook:
References:
Digital Telephony by J. Bellamy
Fundamental of Telecommunication
Network by Tarek N. Saadawi and
Mostafa H. Ammar; Wiley Series.
SPC Digital Telephone Exchange by FJ
Redmill and AR Valder,, IEE
Telecommunication series, Peter Pergrines
Ltd.
Telecommunication Networks by JE
Flood,
IEE Telecommunication series 2nd.
Edition
155
September 2012

Module Number
15
Micro-waves and Antennas
Rationale and
objective of the
module
Module Micro-waves and Antennas enable to gain the knowledge and

understanding of the working principles of different types of waveguides,
the basic microwave devices and systems. It helps to appreciate the use
of microwave devices and systems that they come across in their carriers.
This module introduces on optics and optical communications system
using fibers, and provides basic understanding of the nature of light, its
propagation through different media and methods of analysis of optical
transmission. It also introduces functional concepts of optical fibers and
their applications in communications.
The module covers the wireless and Mobile Communications in term of
basic principles of wireless and mobile communications systems and
their associated performances. It provides a good understanding of
fundamental problems and counter-measure techniques in digital
communications over wireless mobile channels.
The module helps to understand the concept of the modern switching
used in Integrated Service Digital Network. It helps to gain insight into
principles of various digital switching, like packet switching and
introduction to advances in switching and able to identify and understand
the application, operation and maintenance of these digital switching.
Microwave Devices and Systems:
different types of waveguides, mostly passive and partly active
microwave devices & systems and their application in
communication systems. The course focuses on concepts, theories
and applications of microwave devices and systems. The course also
comprises of a term paper
Optics and Optical Communication:
Historical overview of optical fiber communications and current
importance. Physics of light: geometric optics, ray matrix Gaussian
beam and selected instruments, Wave nature of Light, Maxwells
Equations, propagation of light through media with varying index of
refraction. Fibers: properties and construction principles and
techniques; Single-and multi-mode fibers; attenuation and
dispersions in fibers. Sources of light: light emitting diodes ad laser
sources. Modulation techniques and modulators, WDM techniques.
Detectors, P-i-n receivers. Noise and noise to signal ratio.
Introduction to selected transmission systems in fibers.
Wireless and Mobile Communication Systems:
Overview of mobile and wireless networking with an emphasis on
system architecture, the physical and medium access layers, and
mobility management; Fundamental concepts in mobile wireless
systems: propagation, multipath, Raleigh and Rician fading, second
and third-generation; TDMA and CDMA cellular systems,
156
September 2012
registration, authentication, channel assignment, frequency planning;

Cell splitting, power control, handoffs, dynamic channel allocation,
smart antennas, system capacity, and network evolution; Special
emphasis on spread spectrum CDMA technology and systems:
spreading gain, RAKE reception, power control.
EM Waves & Guide Structures
Understand and quantify the effects of accelerated charges in
producing time-varying electromagnetic waves. Be able to derive- from
Maxwells equations- the governing equations for EM wave
propagation, RF transmission lines, rectangular waveguides and
resonant cavities.
Understand and quantify how antennas launch electromagnetic waves
into the surrounding medium. Understand types of antennas and describe
their radiation characteristics

module
Time allocated
Lecture
24*27=648
160
Course Number
ECEG-5155
ECEG-5153
ECEG-4151
ECEG-5154
ECEG-5152
Tutorial
Lab/pract
240
0
Course Name
Wireless and Mobile Communication Systems
EM Waves and Guide structures
Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation
157
Home study
248
ECTS
5
5
5
4
5
September 2012

Course Title: Wireless and Mobile
Pre-requisites: ECEG-4141:
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: X
Module: Micro-waves and Antennas
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

principles of different types of Wireless Mobile
communication systems.
Understand and application frequency reuse and
efficient spectral use.
Mobile communication.
The course will provide a good understanding of
fundamental
problems
and
counter-measure
techniques in digital communications over wireless
mobile channels.
The course will serve students as background for an
advanced study in wireless communications
Gain insight into principles of various digital
switching, like packet switching and introduction to
advances in switching.
To be able to identify and understand the
application, operation and maintenance of these
digital switching.
Overview of Wireless and Mobile Communications.
Wireless Communication Channels: Channel Models
and Propagation.
Digital Modulation and Error Control
Time Domain Equalization (Viterbi Algorithm and
Decision Feedback Equalization) and Spatial Domain
Processing (Smart Antennas).
TDMA Cellular Systems and Engineering: Frequency
Reuse, Sectorization, Splitting and Blocking
Probability.
TDMA Cellular Systems Engineering II: Channel
Assignment
Techniques,
Dynamic
Channel
Allocation, and Handoffs.
Spread Spectrum Technology [CDMA, FHSS, and
RAKE reception].
CDMA Cellular Architectures: system architecture,
power control, and system capacity.
CDMA Cellular Architectures II: Mobility
management, soft handoffs, interference cancellation.
The GSM 2G system and its evolution to 2.5G: GSM
system operation.
S-95: CDMA based 2G system, system architecture
and performance.
3G/4G Systems Architecture and Technology;
158
September 2012
Mobile IP/TCP, user and foreign agents; course

review
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objective
CHAPTER ONE :
Introduction to mobile and wireless
communication
1.1.Overview of wireless and mobile
communications
1.2.Wireless network applications:
wireless market
1.3.Future wireless networks
1.4.Wireless communication channels
1.5.Channel models and propagation
1.6.Channel equalization
1.7. Introduction to Channel assignment
CHAPTER TWO:
2.1. Introduction to
digital
communication
Performance
At the end of this

be able to understand
what mobile and
wireless
communication,
channel models and
propagation,
channel equalization
and
Channel assignment.
Time
Allotted
1 week
At the end of this 1 week

chapter, students are be
able to understand what
digital modulation and
error control is.
At the end of this

2 weeks
time domain
equalization is.
Spatial Domain
Processing (Smart
Antennas).
At the end of this
3weeks
cellular systems are,
Determine TDMA
architecture, channel
assignment,
sectorization and
frequency re-use,
blocking probability,
and Hand offs, and Cell
splitting
At the end of this
2 weeks
spreading spectrum is
System
2.2. Digital modulation

2.3. Error control
CHAPTER THEREE
Time Domain Equalization
3.1. Introduction
3.2. Viterbi Algorithm
3.2.1. Decision Feedback Equalization

3.3. Spatial Domain Processing (Smart Antennas).
CHAPTER FOUR
Cellular systems engineering
4.1. Introduction
4.2. TDMA Cellular Systems and Engineering
4.2.1. Frequency Reuse,
4.2.2. Sectorization, Splitting
4.2.3. Blocking Probability
4.3. TDMA Cellular Systems and Engineering II
4.3.1. Channel Assignment Techniques,
4.3.2. Dynamic Channel Allocation
4.3.3. Handoffs.
CHAPTER FIVE
5.1.Introduction to spreading spectrum
5.2.Fading of wireless communications
5.3.Spread Spectrum Technology
159

5.3.1.
5.3.2.
5.3.3.
5.3.4.
CDMA
FHSS
RAKE reception and RAKE receivers
Direct sequence spreading spectrum
systems
September 2012
and
Rake reception.
FHSS
DSSS
Fading of wireless
communication
channels
At the end of this 3 weeks
CDMA is and
Its architecture.
Its power control
Interference
cancelation
Mobility management
CHAPTER SIX
CDMA Cellular Architectures

6.1.Introduction to CDMA
6.1.1. CDMA system architecture
6.1.2. CDMA power control
6.1.3. CDMA system capacity
6.1.4. CDMA channel concept
6.2.CDMA Cellular Architectures II

6.2.1. Mobility management, ,
6.2.2. soft handoffs

6.2.3. Interference cancellation.
CHAPTER SEVEN
At the end of this 3 weeks
The generation of cellular systems
7. Introduction to the generation of cellular
systems
stages does the cellular
7.1.The GSM 2G system and its evolution
system go through to
to 2.5G:
reach this stage.
7.1.1. GSM system operation.
First, second, third,
7.2.S-95
forth, and next
7.2.1. CDMA based 2G system
generation cellular
7.2.2. System architecture and
systems
performance.
Mobile TCP/IP
7.3.3G/4G Systems Architecture and
operation
Technology;
7.3.1. Mobile IP/TCP
7.3.2. user and foreign agents;
7.4.course review
Attendance (5%); Assignment (20%),
Chapter Quizzes (15%); Tests (20%); Final
Examination (40%)
Literature
Textbook:
----References:
Wireless and Mobile Network
Architectures, Yi-Bing Lin and Imrich
Chlamtac, Wiley 2001.
The Mobile Communications Handbook
SECOND EDITION, Jerry Gibson
[editor], CRC Press 1999.
Introduction to Wireless
Telecommunications systems and
networks
160
September 2012

Course Title: Microwave Devices and
Pre-requisites:
Systems 3(2 3 0)
ECEG-4151: EM Waves and Guide
Structures
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Course Objective and Competences to be Acquired:

Appreciate the use of microwave devices and systems
that they come across in their carriers and daily life.
principles of different types of waveguides
Understand and use the basic microwave devices and
systems (both classical and modern)
Appreciate the use of microwave devices
and
systems that they come across in their
carriers
and daily life
The course mainly deals with different types of
waveguides, mostly passive and partly active
microwave devices & systems and their application in
communication systems. The course focuses on
concepts, theories and applications of microwave
devices and systems. The course also comprises of a
term paper
The course consists of:
Principles and Analysis of Waveguides
Introduction to Microwave Circuits
Review of Network Parameters and Transmission
Line Theory
The Scattering Parameters
Impedance Matching
Passive Microwave Components and Networks
Introduction to Active Microwave Devices
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER-1
RF/Microwave Systems
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Revision of Maxwells
Equation
1.3 RF, M-Wave, and millimeter
wave applications
1.4 Freq bands and modes of
operation
1.5 Review of Waveguide
analysis
Chapter Objectives
Revise some important topics such
as Maxwells Equations and basic
waveguide analysis.
Describe some areas of Microwave

and Millimeter Wave Applications.
161
Time Allotted
2 Weeks
September 2012
1.6 Elementary Definitions

1.7 Basic RF transmitters and
Receivers
CHAPTER-2
Lumped and Distributed Systems
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Transition form RF to
Microwave Circuits
2.3 Parasitic Effects on Lumped
Elements
2.4 Distributed Elements
2.5 Hybrid Element
Helical Coil
CHAPTER-3
Active Devices
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Diodes
3.3 Microwave Transistors
Transistor classification
Transistor structure
DC model of BJT
3.4 Hetrojunction Bipolar
transistors
3.5 Microwave FET
MOSFETS
GaAs MESFETS
HEMT
CHAPTER-4
Two-port Networks
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Two Port Parameters
4.3 S Parameters
4.4 Stability
4.5 Gain
Power Gain
Voltage Gain
Current Gain
4.6 Introduction to Three-Ports
CHAPTER-5
Impedance Matching
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Smith Charts and Matching
5.3 Impedance Matching
Networks
5.4 Element Matching
Single Element
Two Element
5.5Matching Networks
3 Weeks
Distinguish between lumped and
Distributed elements based on the
physical length of the lumped
components.
Investigate the parasitic effects on
Lumped Elements.
2 Weeks
Introduces some of the Active
Microwave devices such as
Diodes, BJT Transistors, and Field
Effect Transistors.
3 Weeks
Describe some of the tools needed
for RF/Microwave Design such as
Scattering Parameters.
Analyze the Stability and gain of
two-port systems using SParameters.
3 Weeks
Design Impedance Matching
Networks using Smith Chart.
Design Matching Networks using
Lumped and Distributed Element
method.
162
September 2012
Using Lumped Elements

Using Distributed
Elements
5.6 Bandwidth Constraints
CHAPTER-6
Microwave Filters
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Low Pass Prototype Filter
Design
Butterworth Response
Chebyshev Response
6.3 LP, HP, and BP Filters
6.4 Transmission Line Filters

Literature
2 Weeks
Describe a simple practical design
process which will solve basic
filter needs.

(Reading+ mini project).
(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Microwave Circuit Design using linear and
non-linear techniques, by Vendelin/Pavio
Computer Aided Design of Microwave
Circuits, by K.C. Gupta
Passive and Active Microwave Circuits, by J.
Helszajn
Foundations of Microwave Engineering, by
R.E. Collin
Microwave Transistor Amplifier Analysis and
Design, by G. Gonzalez
163
September 2012

Course Title: Optics and Optical
Pre-requisites:
Communication: 3(2,3,0)
ECEG-4141: Communication Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester:IX
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents
This is an introductory course on optics and optical

communications using fibers. The Course provides a
basic understanding of the nature of light, its
propagation through different media and methods of
analysis of optical transmission.
It also introduces functional concepts of optical fibers
and their applications in communications. After the
completion of the course the student is expected to
have acquired.
principles of different principle of optical
Gain insight into principles of various optical
switching/modulation.
To be able to identify and understand the application,
operation
and
maintenance
of
optical
communications.
Course overview. Maxwells equations, wave
equation.
Polarization States, Geometric Optics (Lenses and
Mirrors), Ray-Matrix Methods.
Reflection, Total Internal Reflection, TE and TM
waves, Brewster's Angle.
Two-beam
interferometry,
the
Michelson
interferometer.
Diffraction: Fresnel and Fraunhofer Diffraction,
Spatial Frequency Diffraction examples: Slits,
Apertures, Double slit.
Properties of optical fibers: Advantages of using
optical fibers; loss, dispersion, and physical
limitation; critical optical properties.
Optical Waveguides Theories, fabrication, and
applications of various optical waveguides used as
building blocks in optical communication.
Optical sources and transmitters: Physics and
technologies, development for lasers, LEDs, and
modulators for use in different transmitters.
Optical detectors and receivers Physics and
technology development of photo detectors,
signal/clock recovery, and construction of optical
receivers.
164
September 2012
Optical amplifiers Semiconductor amplifier, EDFAs,

EDWAs, and their applications. Detection noise and
optical dispersion: Sources and detection of noise and
dispersion impairment on signal recovery and biterror rate.
Literature

Examination (40%)
Textbook:
References:
Fiber-Optic Communications Technology,
Djafar K. Mynbaev and Lowell L. Scheiner
Prentice Hall, 2001
Lightwave Technology:
Telecommunication Systems, Govind P.
Agrawal John Wiley and Son, Inc., 2005
Lightwave Technology : Components and
Devices by Govind P. Agrawal John Wiley
and Son, Inc., 2004
Optical Electronics; by A. Yariv, 3rd
Edition. Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1991.
165
September 2012

Course Title: EM Waves & Guide
Pre-requisites:
Structures: 3 (2,3,0)
System
Math-2023: Applied Mathematics III
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Understand and quantify the effects of accelerated

charges in producing time-varying electromagnetic
waves.
Be able to derive- from Maxwells equations- the
governing equations for EM wave propagation, RF
transmission lines, rectangular waveguides and
resonant cavities.
Have gained insight into the applications of RF
transmission lines, the use of Smith Chart and
matching techniques.
Review of Vectors and Maxwell's Equations.
Integrals; Gradient of a Scalar field, Divergence &
Curl of a Vector Field, the Divergence & Stokes's
Theorems, Laplacian of a Scalar Field; Solenoidal &
Irrotational Vector Fields, Helmholz's Theorem;
Field Quantities; Maxwell's Equations; Boundary
Conditions; Time-Harmonic Fields.
Electromagnetic Wave Propagation
Waves in General; Wave Propagation in Lossy
Dielectrics; Plane Waves in Free Space; Plane Waves
in Lossless Dielectrics; Plane Waves in Good
Conductors; Power and Poynting Vector, Poynting
Theorem; Refection of Plane Wave at Normal and
Oblique Incidence; Summary of TEM Waves.
Transmission Lines
Electrical Dimension, Circuit and Field Analysis;
Transmission Line Equations; Input Impedance,
SWR, and Power; The Smith Chart; Some
Application of Transmission Lines.
Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides; TM Modes;
TE Modes; Power Transmission and Attenuation;
Waveguide Resonators.
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Review of Vectors and Maxwell's
Equations 1.1 Scalar & Vector Fields
1. Line, Surface, & Volume Integrals
Chapter Objective
To
Differentiate,
and
Mathematically
manipulate
about Vectors and Maxwells
166
Time Allotted
2 weeks
September 2012
1.3 Gradient of a Scalar field

equation.
1.4 Divergence & Curl of a Vector Field
1.5 The Divergence & Stokes's Theorems
1.6 Laplacian of a Scalar Field
1.7 Solenoidal & Irrotational Vector
Fields
1.8 Helmholz's Theorem
1.9 Field Quantities
1.10 Maxwell's Equations
1.11 Boundary Conditions
CHAPTER 2
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Waves in General
2.3 Wave Propagation in Lossy
Dielectrics
2.4 Plane waves in Lossless Dielectrics
2.5 Plane waves in Free Space
2.6 Plane waves in Good Conductors
2.7Power and the Poynting Vectors
2.8 Reflection of a plane wave at Normal
Incidence
2.9 Reflection of a plane wave at Oblique
Incidence
To characterize the wave in 4 weeks

general, its propagation in Lossy
and Lossless Dielectrics.
CHAPTER 3
Transmission Lines
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Transmission Line Parameters
3.3 Transmission Line Equations
3.4 Input Impedance .SWR ,and Power
3.5 The Smith Chart
3.6 Some Application of Transmission
Lines.
To enable students to determine 4 weeks

the transmission line parameters
using
transmission
line
equations and the Smith Chart.
CHAPTER 4
Waveguides
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Rectangular Waveguides
4.3Transeverse Magnetic (TM) Modes
4.4 Transverse Electric (TE ) Modes
4.5 Wave Propagation in the Guide
4.6 Power Transmission and Attenuation
4.7 Wave Guide Current and Mode
Excitation
4.8 Waveguide Resonators.
4.9 Dielectric Slab Waveguides

Rectangular Waveguides, TM
Modes, TE Modes, Power
Transmission and Attenuation
and Waveguide Resonators.
To know about plane waves in

Free
Space
and
Good
Conductors; power and pointing
vectors as well as reflection of
plane wave at normal & oblique
incidence.
167
5 weeks

Literature
September 2012
Lectures, tutorials, assignments, and project, etc

(40%)
Textbook:
Matthew N. O. Sadiku, Elements of
Electromagnetics, Oxford University Press,
New York, 2001
References:
Hayt, W.H., Engineering Electromagnetics,
4th ed., McGraw-Hill, 1981.
David J. Griffiths, Introduction to
Electrodynamics, 3rd ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
1999
168
September 2012

Course Title: Antennas and Radio Wave
Pre-requisites:
Propagation: 3(2,3,0)
System
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER-1
Understand and quantify how antennas launch

electromagnetic waves into the surrounding
medium.
Understand types of antennas and describe their
radiation characteristics.
Have gained insight into how radio waves (Ground
waves, Sky waves, Line of Sight waves, etc.)
propagate in to space.
Radiation Integrals and Auxiliary Potential
Functions.
The Vector Potential A for an Electric Current
Source J; The Vector Potential F for a Magnetic
Current Source M; Electric and Magnetic Fields
for Electric (J) and Magnetic (M) Current
Sources; Solution of the Inhomogeneous Vector
Potential Wave Equation; Far-Field Radiation;
Duality Theorem; Reciprocity and Reaction
Theorems.
Wire Antennas
Antenna Types; Hertzian Dipole; Half-Wave
Dipole Antenna; Quarter-Wave Monopole
Antenna; Small Loop Antenna.
Antenna Characteristics
Radiation Resistance, Radiation Pattern,
Radiation Intensity, Directive Gain and
Directivity, Power Gain.
Antenna Arrays
Two Element Array; N- Element Linear Array;
Broadside Array; Ordinary End-Fire Array;
Phased (Scanning) Array; Hansen-Woodyard
End-Fire Array.
Radio Wave Propagation
Ground Wave Propagation; Space Wave
Propagation; Line of Sight Propagation;
Ionospheric Propagation; Noise.
Chapter Objectives
169
Time Allotted
2 Weeks

Antennas
Fundamental Parameters
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Types of Antennas
1.3 Radiation
Pattern
Power Density
Intensity
1.4 Beam Width, and Efficiency
1.5 Directivity
1.6 Gain
1.7 Bandwidth and Polarization
1.8 Input Impedance
1.9 Antenna Radiation Efficiency
CHAPTER-2
Radiation Integrals and Auxiliary
Potential functions
2.1 Introduction
2.2 The Vector Potential A for an
Electric Current Source J
2.3 Vector Potential F for a
Magnetic Current Source M
2.4 Electric and Magnetic Fields
for Electric (J) and Magnetic (M)
Current Sources
2.5 Solution of the
Inhomogeneous Vector Potential
Wave Equation
2.6 Far-Field Radiation
2.7 Duality Theorem
2.8 Reciprocity and Reaction
Theorems
CHAPTER-3
Linear and Loop Antennas
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Linear Antenna
3.3 Hertzian Dipole
3.4 Standing Wave Antennas
3.5 Half Wave Dipole
3.6 Monopole Antennas
3.7 Traveling Wave Antenna
3.8 Loop Antennas
3.9 Circular Loops
3.10 Square Loops
3.11 Mobile Communication
System Application
CHAPTER-4
Antenna Array and Synthesis
September 2012
Up on the completion of this

chapter, the student will be able
to differentiate b/n different
types of Antennas.
Calculate the input impedance,
power density, intensity, beam
width, gain of the Antennas
radiation.
4 Weeks
Calculate the vector potential A
for and electric source, an
Antenna.
Solve the inhomogeneous wave
equation.
Analyze Far-Field radiation
patterns of the antenna and also
apply the Duality, Reciprocity,
and Reaction Theorems.
4Weeks
To introduce one of the oldest
and simplest forms of Antenna,
wire antennas.
Calculate
the
far
field,
intermediate and Near field
constants.
Introduce the basic forms of loop
antennae.
Calculate the power density,
radiation intensity, radiation
resistance and directivity of Loop
antennas.
3 Weeks
Define
170
the
geometrical

4.1 Introduction
4.2 Two Element Array
4.3 N-Element Linear Array
Uniform Amplitude Array
Directivity
4.4 Broadside Array
4.5 Continuous Sources
4.6 Fourier Transform Method
4.7 Wood-Ward Lawson Method
CHAPTER-5
Radio Wave Propagation
5.1. Introduction
5.2. Ground Wave Propagation
5.3. Space Wave Propagation
5.4. Line of Sight Propagation
5.7. Ionospheric Propagation
Literature
September 2012
configuration of overall array

(linear, circular, rectangular,
spherical)
Calculate the total field radiated
for Two-element and N-element
array.
Analyze different types of
sources in synthesis of Antennas.
2 Weeks
Introduce the basics of radio
wave propagation in different
media.

(40%)
Textbook:
Woldegiorgis Woldemariam (Prof.), Applied
Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, Addis
Ababa University, 1991
References:
New York, 2001.
Hayt, W.H., Engineering Electromagnetics,
4th ed., McGraw-Hill, 1981.
1999.
S.J Orfanidis, Electromagnetic waves and
Antennas
C. A Balanis, Antenna Theory, Analysis and
Design.
171
September 2012
Electrical Power Focus Modules and Courses

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
12
Instrumentation and Control
Module Instrumentation and Control deals with the basic operational
principles, analysis and design of electrical and electronic instruments. It
also deals with state space modelling, analysis and design of control
systems. The graduates will learn and understand the operating principles
of electrical and electronic instruments and be able to design, analyze and
compare commercial instruments. They will comprehend state space
modelling and be able to carry out analysis and design of control systems
using state space methods.
During the courses of this module the graduate students will:
- Understand the basic operational principles and limitations of
electrical and electronic instruments.

- Be able to analyze and compare commercial instruments and
design similar systems under given constraints.

- Understand and be able to develop and analyze state space models of
control systems.
- Gain insight into design, analysis and synthesis of controllers
using state space methods.

Total ECTS of the
module
Time allocation
10*27=270
Course Number
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4122
10
Lecture
64
Tutorial
Lab/pract
64
32
Course Name
172
Home study
110
ECTS
5
5
September 2012

Pre-requisites:
Engineering
Systems
Organization
(co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Instrumentation and Control
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

General Principles
Output Presentation
Semiconductor
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
1.1 Definitions
1.4 Types of Error
1.7 Limiting Errors
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
To introduce different types of 1 week
error, Significant figures and
Statistical Analysis as well as
Probability of Errors
CHAPTER 2
To understand principles and 4 weeks

173
September 2012
Direct Current Indicating Instruments

Galvanometer
2.15 Permanent .Magnet moving coil
mechanism (PMMC)
2.17 DC Ammeters
2.18 DC Voltmeters
2.24 Calibration of Dc Instruments
CHAPTER 3
Instruments
3.1 Introduction
Measurements
3.8 Watt-hour meter
application of DC indicating
Instruments.
CHAPTER 4
Transducers
4.10 Strain Gages
To introduce about different

type of sensors.
3 weeks
CHAPTER 5
systems
5.5 Multiplexing
Understand how DAC and ADC

are working.
2 weeks
Able to design different types of

multimeter and calibrate Dc
instruments.
To understand principles and 4 weeks

application of AC indicating
Instruments.
174
September 2012
CHAPTER 6
Oscilloscopes
6.1 Introduction
6.5 Delay line
To introduce about the basic

operation of CRO and CRT.

(40%)
Textbook:
William David Cooper, Electronic
instrumentation and Measurement
Techniques.
References:
B.E. Jones, Instrumentation Measurement
and Feedback
Literature
175
1 week
September 2012

Course Title: Modern Control Systems: 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,3,0)
ECEG-3111:
Introduction
Engineering
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VI
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Laboratory Exercise

Literature
to
Control
Understand and develop State space representation

of control systems
Analyze system models in state space model
Design and synthesize controllers in state space
Mathematical modeling of control systems,
Coordinate transformation and solution to state
equations, Stability, Controllability, Observability of
control systems, Control systems design in state
space, Introduction to non-linear control systems,
introduction to optimum control. Continuous and
discrete systems.
Mathematical modeling of control systems
Concepts of state, state-space representation of
systems, and transformation from state-space
representation to transfer function, Eigen values
and eigenvectors.
State transformation and solution of state space
equations
State transition matrix, state transition equation,
the canonical forms of state space
representation, solution for states equations
represented in canonical forms.
Stability, Controllability, Observability of control
systems
Asymptotic stability, BIBO stability, State
controllability, output controllability, state
observability.
Control systems design in state space
Pole-placement design with state feedback Pole
placement and controller design with state
observer, Controller design using MATLAB,
Introduction to analogue computations.
Introduction to non-linear and optimal control
systems
Transformation of system models, Solution of state
space equations, and Controller design using
MATLAB.
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment.
Textbook:
176
September 2012
G. Mulissa ,Introduction to control Engineering

References:
Modern Control Engineering by Katsuhiko
OGATA, Fourth Edition
John J. D Azzo and Houpis
Matrix analysis by Bellman
Gopal
177
September 2012
Module characterization form

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
13
Machines and Drives
Module Machines and Drives deals with the basic principles of
electromechanical energy conversion devices, construction and operation
of transformers, DC and AC machines. It also deals with operating
principles and operating characteristics of electric drives, industrial driven
units. The graduates will understand the operating principles &
characteristics and parallel operation of transformers. They will gain
insight into construction, operation and control of DC & AC machines and
be able to carry out performance analysis of these machines. The graduates
will gain knowledge of operating principles and characteristics of electric
drives and be able to develop drive systems for common industrial driven
units.
During the courses of this module the students will be able to:
- Learn and understand inrush currents, harmonics and conditions for
parallel operation and design aspects of transformers.
- Gain knowledge and understand D.C. armature winding & A.C.
windings.
- Understand dynamic equations and control aspect of D.C machines.
- Gain knowledge and comprehend salient pole synchronous machine
features, reference frame transformation, d-q axis theory, power/load
angle relationship and carry out transient analysis.
- Understand the principle of operation and construction of fractional
horsepower motors.
- Gain knowledge of elements and characteristics, and operation
principles of electric drives
- Understand the desired operating characteristics of various industrial
driven units
- Be able to select drive elements and develop drive system for
common industrial driven units
Total ECTS of the
module
Time allocation
9*27=243
Course Number
ECEG-4131
ECEG-5132
9
Lecture
64
Tutorial
Lab/pract
64
32
Course Name
Electrical Machines
Power Electronics and Electric Drives
178
Home study
83
ECTS
5
4
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Machines : 3 (2,3,0) Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3091: Introduction
Machines
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Machines and Drives
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
to
Electrical

To understand the basic principles of
electromechanical energy conversion devices.
To learn and understand inrush currents,
harmonics and conditions for parallel operation
and design aspects of transformers.
To learn and understand D.C. armature winding
& A.C. windings.
To understand dynamic equations and control
aspect of D.C machines.
To understand salient pole synchronous machine
features, reference frame transformation, d-q axis
theory, power/load angle relationship and carry
out transient analysis.
To understand the principle of operation and
construction of fractional horsepower motors.
Principle of electromechanical energy conversion
Transformer
Induction machine
D.C machines
Synchronous machines
Fractional horsepower motors
Lectures, tutorials, lab demonstration seminar/ project
& assignments
Textbook:
G. Mullisa: Introduction to Electrical Machines
References:
Kosow: Electric Machinery and Control, PrenticeHall
McGraw-Hill
Fitzgerald, C. Kingsley, & S. D. Umans: Electric
Machinery
M.G. Say: Alternating Current machines
Applications
179
September 2012

Course Title: Power Electronics and Electric Pre-requisites:
Drives : 3 (2,1,2)
ECEG-4131: Electrical Machines
ECTS Credit: 4
Semester: IX
Module: Machines and Drives
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
The course aims to introduce students to the

fundamentals of power electronics and drives.
The students will be able to understand elements
and characteristics, and operation principles of
electric drives.
The students will have a sound understanding of
understanding of the desired operating
characteristics of various industrial driven units.
The students will be able to select drive elements
and develop drive system for common industrial
driven units.
Contents
Introduction
Basic elements of electric drives
Torque-speed characteristics of industrial driven
units
Torque-speed characteristics of electric motors
Power supply for electric motors
Control of electric drives.
Dynamic behavior of electric drives
Torques acting in a drive system
Referring torque and moment of inertia from one
axis to other axis
Energy losses in transient
Operation of electric motors in motoring and
braking modes
Starting of electric motors, etc.
Power converters to supply electric drives
Semiconductor devices
Single-phase AC-DC converters
Three-phase AC-DC converters
DC-DC converters
Single-phase and three-phase DC-AC inverters
AC-AC converters
Control circuits for power converters.
Electric drives and Control
Electric drive system model
Controller design for DC motors, Induction
motors, and Brushless DC motors
Feedback elements.
180
September 2012
Motor rating selection

Heating and motor power rating
Load diagram
Motor selection for continuous duty, intermittent
duty and short time duty.
Characteristics of electric drives for common
applications
Crane and hoist drives
Centrifugal pumps
Steel rolling mills, cement mills and sugar mills
Electric machine tools and turbo compressors,
etc.
Literature

& assignments
Textbook:
References:
Vedam Subrahmanyam: Electric Drives Concepts
and applications by, McGraw-Hill 1996.
Electric Drive by Jacob Feinberg, Mir Publishers,
1978
Industrial Brushless servos by Peter Moreton,
Newnes, 2000
181
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
14
Power Engineering
Module Power Engineering deals with the basic principles and
comprehensive treatment of modeling, analysis and operation of
power systems. It also covers load forecasting techniques and basic
design concepts of generating stations, switchyard, and transmission
lines and HVDC transmission. The module also deals with operation
of power systems and it also covers power pool issues and cost
analysis of generation systems
The graduates will be able to understand fundamentals of power
systems and modeling of power system components for power
transmission and distribution and carry out performance analysis of
transmission lines. They will comprehend power system transients
and be able to carry out fault analysis and stability analysis of
power systems. The graduates will be able to carry out load flow
analysis understand the fundamentals of economic load dispatch.
The graduates will be able to plan and design generating stations,
switchyards, and transmission lines and comprehend fundamentals
of HVDC transmission systems.
They will be able to understand fundamentals of load forecasting
techniques, basic design concepts of generating stations,
switchyards, and transmission lines. They will also be able to carry
out cost analysis of generation systems.
-
know fundamentals of power systems and learn modeling of

power system components for power transmission and
distribution.
Understand analytical methods for calculation of line
Parameters.
Be able to carry out performance analysis of transmission lines,
cables and overhead line insulators.
Learn comprehensive analysis of symmetrical and
unsymmetrical faults in power systems.
Be able to understand and analyze power system transients.
know the analytical techniques of stability analysis of power
systems.
Comprehend and be able to carry out load flow studies and
economic load dispatch.
Be able to learn and understand fundamentals of load
forecasting techniques, basics design concepts of generating
stations, switchyards, and transmission lines.
Learn and understand calculation of transmission losses and
comprehend optimal operation of power systems.
182

Total ECTS of the
module
Time allocation
25*27=675
Course Number
ECEG-4141
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5143
ECEG-5144
ECEG-5145
September 2012
Be able to carry out cost analysis of generation systems.

Get familiar with fundamentals of HVDC transmission.
25
Lecture
144
Tutorial
Lab/pract
208
32
Course Name
Power Systems I
Power Systems II
Power System Planning & Operation
Power system protection & control
Computer Applications to power system
183
Home study
291
ECTS
5
5
5
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Power Systems I:3(2 3 0)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3091: Introduction to
Machines
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Power Engineering
Lecturer: TBA.

to be Acquired
Contents
Electrical

fundamentals of power systems.
fundamentals of power systems and modeling
power system components for power transmission
and distribution.
The students will be able to understand analytical
methods for calculation of line parameters.
performance analysis of transmission lines, cable
and overhead line insulators.
The students will be able to comprehend analysis
of symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults in power
systems.
Fundamentals of power systems
AC and DC transmission
Single-phase and three-phase transmission
Complex power
Structure of a power system Introduction to power
transformers, CTs and PTs etc.
Representation of power system components
Single-phase solution of balanced three-phase
networks
One-line diagram and impedance or reactance
diagram
Per unit (PU) system.
Transmission line parameters
Resistance of transmission lines.
Skin effect and proximity effect.
Inductance of single-phase two-wire line,
composite conductor lines, three-phase line with
unsymmetrical spacing, double circuit three-phase
lines and bundled conductors.
Capacitance of a two-wire line, three-phase line
with equilateral and unsymmetrical spacing, effect
of earth on transmission line capacitance.
Mechanical design of transmission lines
Sag and tension calculations
Effect of wind and ice
Stringing chart
Sag template.
184
September 2012
Characteristic and performance of power transmission

lines
ABCD constants
Representation of transmission lines
Short, medium and long transmission lines
Steady-state performance efficiency and
regulation.
Corona
Disruptive critical voltage
Corona loss
Line design based on corona Advantages and
disadvantages of corona.
Overhead line insulators
Types of insulators
Potential distribution over a string of insulators
Methods of equalizing potential.
Underground cables
Types of cables
Capacitance of single-core and three-core cables
Insulation resistance of a cable
Power factor and heating of cables.
Contents
Chapter Objectives
CHAPTER 1
Introduces the main sources of
Introduction to Power Generation
Electrical Power.
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Generation of Electricity
Describe the comparison of d/t
1.3 Sources of Electrical Power
source power plants with respect
1.4 Comparison of Sources Power
to cost, Pollution and Space
CHAPTER 2
Elements of Transmission and
Describe how long distance
Distribution
transmission of Electrical energy
2.1 Introduction
is achieved.
2.2 Transmission of electrical
energy
Introduce the typical power
- DC and AC
transmission scheme.
2.3 Systems of Transmission
2.4 Power Scheme (typical)
CHAPTER 3
Constants of Transmission Line
Convey
the
basics
of
3.1 Introduction
electromagnetism
in
3.2 Concepts of
Transmission Lines.
Electromagnetism
3.3 Magnetic Field intensity
Determine various Transmission
3.4 Inductance of
Line
Parameters
such
as
- Parallel Conductor
Inductance, Capacitance and
- 3 line
Resistance for d/t single-phase
3.5 Transposition
and three-Phase systems.
3.6 Capacitance
- 1 and 3
Calculate the magnetic field
3.7 Resistance
intensity with in a round strait
3.8 Skin Effect
conductor.
185
Time Allotted
2 Weeks
2 Weeks
3 Weeks

3.9 Proximity Effect
CHAPTER 4
Short Transmission Lines
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Capacitance Effect
4.3 Inductance Effect
4.4 Line Calculations
- Normal T method
- Normal Method
CHAPTER 5
Long Transmission Lines
5.1 Introduction
- Differential equation
- Derived line Constants
- Parallel Circuits
- Series Circuits
5.3 Two-port Network
- ABCD parameters
CHAPTER 6
Overhead Lines
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Types of Conductors
6.3 Line Supports
- Span
6.4 Sag and Tension
6.5 Over head line Insulators
- Materials of Insulators
- Types of Insulators
6.6 Effect of Wind and Ice
6.7 Corona
CHAPTER 7
Cables
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Classification of Cables
7.3 Cable Conductors
7.4 Cable Construction
- Insulation
7.5 Insulation Resistance
7.6 Capacitance of Cables
- Single Core
- Three Core
Literature
September 2012
2 Weeks
Define the circuit representation

of Short Transmission Line.
Introduce
to
methods
calculation for Short T.L.
of
2 Weeks
Define Circuit representation of
Long Transmission Lines.
Calculate the Impedance for
Different Long T.L. setups
2 Weeks
Define the basic mechanical
properties of Overhead Lines.
Calculate, the spacing, sag,
tension of Overhead lines for
HV, MV, and LV.
2 Weeks
Identify the advantages and
disadvantages of UG cables.
Calculate
the
UG
cable
parameters such as insulation
resistance and capacitance.

(40%)
Textbook:
S. L. Uppal, Electrical Power
186
September 2012
References:
J. D. Glover and M. S. Sarma, Power System
Analysis and Design, Brooks/Cole, Third
Edition, 2002.
C. L. Wadhwa, Electrical Power Systems,
New Age International Publishers, 2004.
Syed Nasar, Electrical Power systems,
Schaums Outline Series, McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company, 2004.
George G. Karady, Keith E. Holbert,
Electrical Energy Conversion and Transport:
An Interactive Computer-Based Approach,
Wiley-IEEE Press, 2005.
187
September 2012

Course Title: Power Systems II:3 (2 1 2)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-4141 Power Systems I
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
The course aims to equip students with the basic

principles and comprehensive treatment of analysis,
operation and protection of power systems.
The students will learn and understand the
analytical techniques of fault analysis and stability
analysis.
The students will be able to understand and
analyze power system transients.
load flow studies.
Contents
Fault analysis
Symmetrical 3-phase faults
Symmetrical components
Unsymmetrical faults.
Power system transients
Surge phenomenon
Reflection and refraction of waves
Attenuation of traveling waves
Determination of system voltage produced by
traveling waves
Generation of switching over-voltages on
transmission lines
Power system stability
Stability & stability limit
Swing equation
Power angle equation
Steady-state stability analysis
Transient stability analysis
Numerical solution of swing equation.
Load flow studies
Network model formulation
Formation of Ybus matrix
Load flow problem
Load flow solutions
Contents
Chapter Objectives
188
Time Allotted

CHAPTER 1
AC Power Transmission And
Fault Analysis
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Problem of EHV and its
advantages
1.3 Types of Short Circuits
1.4 Sources of Fault Current
1.5 Transient
1.6 Symmetrical and
Asymmetrical Short Circuit
Current
1.7 3 short Circuit
1.8 Short Circuit KVA
Calculations
CHAPTER 2
Symmetrical Components and
Unsymmetrical Fault analysis
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Resolution of Unbalanced
Vectors
2.3 Unsymmetrical Impedance
2.4 Ground Faults
- Single line to Ground
- Double line to Ground
CHAPTER 3
Power System Transients
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Surge phenomenon
3.3 Reflection and Refraction of
Waves
3.4 Attenuation of Travelling
Waves
3.5 Switching Over Voltages
CHAPTER 4
Circle Diagram
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Current and Power Relation
4.3 Condition for Maximum
Power
4.4 Power Circle Diagram
- Sending End
- Receiving End
- Combined
CHAPTER 5
Power System Stability
5.1 Introduction
- Stability Limit
- The Problem of Stability
5.2 Power Angle Diagram
5.3 Swing Equation
5.4 Steady State Stability
September 2012
3 Weeks
Describe the types of Power

System Faults and Calculate
their analysis.
Make
the
short
circuit
Symmetrical and Asymmetrical
analysis.
2 Weeks
Represent the unsymmetrical
load
vector
in-terms
of
symmetrical Components.
Calculate the
Impedance.
Unsymmetrical
2 weeks
Explain Causes of Power system
Transients.
Determine
attenuation
and
system voltage developed by
traveling waves.
2 Weeks
Determine Maximum receiving
Power Conditions using Power
Circle Diagram.
3 weeks
Introduce
Power
Stability Problems.
System
Define Stability conditions using

the Power angle diagram.
Analyze the Steady-State and
189

5.5 Transient Stability
CHAPTER 6
Load Flow Studies
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Definition of Load Flow
Problem
6.3 Load Flow Equation
6.4 n-Bus System
CHAPTER 7
Power System Protection
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Protection Components
- Fuses
- Breakers
- Protective Relay
7.3 Protection & Switch Gear
Principles
7.4 Protection of
- Generators
- Feeders
7.5 Protection against Lightning
Literature
September 2012
Transient Stability.
1 Weeks
Define the Load flow problem.
Use different methods to solve
the load flow problems.
2 Weeks
Introduce the main Power
System Protection Components.
Describe the basic Principle of
operation of Different Breakers.
How to protect the main
components of Power System.

(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Edition, 2002.
C. L. Wadhwa, Electrical Power Systems,
New Age International Publishers, 2004.
Allen J. Wood and B.F. Wollenberg, Power
Generation, Operation and Control, 2nd Edn,
John Wiley, 1997.
P. Kundur, Power system Operation and
Control, Tata Mc-grah Hill Edition, 2006.
Syed Nasar, Electrical Power Systems
(Schaums Outline Series), McGraw-hill
Publishing Company, 2004.
190
September 2012

Course Title: Power System Planning and
Pre-requisites:
Operation:3 (2 3 0)
ECEG-4141: Power Systems I
ECEG-5142: Power Systems II (Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired

fundamentals of power system planning and operation.
Contents

fundamentals of load forecasting techniques.
The students will be able to learn and understand
basics design concepts of generating stations,
switchyards, and transmission lines.
calculation of transmission losses, economic load
dispatch and optimal operation of power systems.
The students will be able to carry out cost
analysis of generation systems.
The students will be able to learn and analyze
HVDC transmission.
Load forecasting
Classification and characteristics of loads,
Forecasting methodology
Energy forecasting
Demand forecasting
Peak demand forecasting
Planning and design
General layout and design of generating stations
Switchyard layout
Transmission system planning
Generation system cost analysis
Cost analysis
Production analysis and costing
Environmental cost.
Power system operation
Operation of hydropower generator
Switchyard
Protection & communication system in power
system
Characteristics of generating units
Transmission losses
Representation of transmission losses by Bcoefficient
191
September 2012
Optimal operation of generators on a bus-bar

Optimal load dispatch including transmission
losses
Interchange evaluation and power pool.
HVDC transmission
Principle of AC/DC conversion
Reactive power demand
Economic considerations
Applications of HVDC
Advantages and disadvantages of HVDC systems
Literature
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment (Reading+

Chapter Project).
Textbook:
References:
C.L. Wadhwa, Electrical Power Systems, New Age
International Publishers, 2004.
Generation, Operation and Control, 2nd Edition,
John Wiley, 1997.
W.D. Stevenson, Jr., Elements of Power System
Analysis, 4th Edition, New York: McGraw-hill,
1982.
Gupta: Electrical Power
192
September 2012

Course Title: Power System Protection &
Pre-requisites:
Control: 3(2,3,0)
ECEG-5142: Power Systems II
ECTS Credit: 6
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
Contents

fundamentals of power system protection and control.
The students will understand the principles and
concepts of power system protection and
control.
The students will have sound understanding of
operation of circuit breakers.
The students will comprehend the operating
principles and design considerations of
protective devices and protection systems.
The students will understand and learn
protection of transmission lines, generators,
motors and transformers.
The students will understand and gain
knowledge of automatic generation
and voltage control of interconnected
Power systems.
The students will be able to comprehend the
concepts and terminology used in interchange
evaluation and power pools issues.
The students will be able to carry out reliability
analysis of power systems.
Power system protection
Protective zones
Relaying elements and quantities Operating
principles of relays
Relay types and characteristics Protection of
transmission lines, generators, motors and
transformers
Circuit breakers
Arc and arc extinction
Circuit breaker rating
Circuit breaker types
HVDC circuit breakers
Testing of circuit breakers
Automatic generation and voltage control
Load frequency control
Economic dispatch control
Single-area and two- area load frequency
control
193
September 2012
Interchange evaluation and power pool.

Automatic voltage control
Load frequency control with generation rate
constraints
Speed governor, dead-band and its effect on
automatic generation control (AGC)
Power system reliability analysis

Definition of power system reliability and
quality
Reliability assessment techniques
Reliability indices
Interconnected systems
Laboratory Exercises

Literature
Testing of current transformers under normal, overload

and short circuit conditions; Testing of over-current
relays and directional over-current relays; Testing of
differential protections; Setting and testing of
differential protections on a lab scale model of
transformer, generators and lines; Testing of distance
relays. Setting and testing of distance relays and autoreclose relays on a lab scale model of transmission
lines; Testing of distance relays; Setting and testing of
distance relays and auto-reclosing relays on a lab scale
model of transmission lines
Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment and miniproject.
75% lecture and Tutorial attendance
Textbook:
References:
Generation, Operation and Control, 2nd Edn, John
Wiley, 1996.
Analysis and Design, Brooks/Cole, Third Edition.
Prabha Kumar, Power System Stability and
Control, McGraw-Hill Education.
A. G. Phadke and J.S. Thorp, Computer
Relaying for Power Systems, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1988
194
September 2012

Course Title: Computer Applications in
Pre-requisites:
Power Systems : 2 (1-3-0)
ECEG-5142: Power Systems II
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature

To provide understanding of Supervisory Control
and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system
To provide understanding and insight into on-line
and real-time applications of computers
s
system voltage and excitation control, automatic
generation control (AGC) and economic dispatch
control
To gain insight into computer aided protection
and application of DSP to protection of power
systems
SCADA Systems
On-line and real-time applications of computers
for automatic generation control (AGC) and
voltage control
Economic dispatch control, Computer aided
protection
Application of DSP to protection
Automation: Monitoring, protection and control,
Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs).
& assignments
Textbook:
References:
McGraw-Hill
Machinery
Applications
195
September 2012
Module characterization form

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
15
Energy conversion and distribution
Module Energy Conversion and Distribution deals with the design
and art of electrical installations, energy conversion and rural
electrical electrification. It also deals with hydropower
engineering.
The graduates will learn the science and art of internal and external
illumination of buildings, understand electrical regulations and
standards of wiring design and construction. They will be able to
comprehend contracting documentation, design and drawings. The
graduates will gain insight into renewable energy resources and
technologies, planning and design of small scale and off-grid
electrical power systems and learn the techniques and methods of
planning and designing rural electrification.
They will also learn the design of dams and spillways and understand
and gain knowledge of planning, design and development of hydro
electric power plants.
- Study the science and art of internal and external illumination of
buildings.
- Learn electrical regulations and standards for consumer premises
wiring design, drawing and construction.
- Gain insight into technologies of conventional and nonconventional power plants, renewable energy resources and
technologies.
- Comprehend planning and design of small scale and off-grid
electrical power systems
- Understand the techniques and methods of planning and
designing rural electrification.
- Gain knowledge of planning, design and development of hydro
- Electric power plants.
Total ECTS of the
module
Time allocation
15*27=405
Course Number
ECEG-4151
ECEG-4152
ECEG-5153
15
Lecture
96
Tutorial
Lab/pract
144
0
Course Name
Energy Conversion and Rural Electrification
196
Home study
165
ECTS
5
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Installation : 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,3,0)
ECEG-2093: Electrical Workshop Practice II
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Energy Conversion and Distribution Module Coordinator: TBA.
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
Contents
Laboratory Exercise

Literature

To study the science and art of internal and
external illumination of buildings
To learn electrical regulations and standards for
consumer premises and design wiring and
construction
Learn contracting documentations and design and
construction drawings
Be able to design and install electrical installation
for residential, commercial, social and industrial
premises
Be able to prepare specification, bill of quantities
and cost estimation for electrical contracting
Illumination, Electrical installation in the
consumer premises, Electrical installation cost
estimation, Electrical construction contracting
A typical Debre Berhan residential area distribution
system design; A typical residential building
installation design; A small industrial premises
electrical installation design.
Textbook:
Handouts
References:
IEE regulations
Ethiopian Building Code Standard, Electrical
Installation of Buildings EBCS-10
Electrical Installation Work by Brian Scaddan third
edition
Electrical Installation Principles and Practices by J.
Hyde
The art and science of illumination by Abdella
Abdinaser
197
September 2012

Course Title: Energy Conversion and Rural Pre-requisites:
Electrification : 3 (2,3,0)
MEng-2042: Engineering Thermodynamics
Course Number: ECEG4152
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Energy Conversion and
Distribution
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature

To introduce technologies of conventional and
non-conventional power plants.
To provide an overview of renewable energy
resources and technologies.
To give an insight into planning and design of
small scale and off-grid electrical power systems.
To introduce techniques and methods of planning
and designing rural electrification
Overview of thermodynamics
Thermal power plants
Hydropower
Nuclear power plants
Solar energy
Biomass energy
Wind energy
Geothermal energy
Ocean and Wave energy
Rural electrification
Textbook:
References:
Culp: Principles of Energy Conversion
Keider: Solar Heating and Cooling
Fritz: Small and Mini Hydropower System
198
September 2012

Course Title: Hydropower Engineering :
Pre-requisites:
3(2, 3, 0)
ECEG-4152: Energy Conversion and Rural
Electrification
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Module: Energy Conversion and Distribution Module Coordinator: TBA.
Lecturer: TBA.
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature

To gain insight into concepts of hydropower
engineering.
To provide knowledge of planning, design and
development of hydro electric power plants.
To learn the design of dams and spillways.
To understand the operation of hydraulic
turbines.
Hydropower engineering concepts
Classification of hydropower plants
Hydropower development cycle
Feasibility studies
Design criteria
Dams
Design of spillways and other structures
Hydraulic turbines
Textbook:
References:
Fritz: Small and Mini Hydropower System
--,Hydropower Engineering
199
September 2012
Computer Focus Modules and Courses


Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
12
Interfacing and control
This module named Interfacing and control enables the graduates with
competence in the field on computer based control and interfacing
application development with the computers. The module lays the
foundation through the course Introduction to Instrumentation.
The methods for interfacing various control devices and peripherals with
computer will make the graduates to perceive and develop applications
for various control requirements both at the software and hardware level.
Advanced embedded controls require various VLSI techniques, which
will be imparted to the students through the VLSI design course.
Understand basic functions and concepts of various standard
microcomputer interfaces
Learn the assembly level and high level programming of the
interfaces.
Understand the functionalities and signal levels of various
instruments used in control applications
Get familiarity with instruments used with the interfacing
applications
Learn and apply VLSI design techniques using various VLSI
tools
Design control applications like Robotics using standard
computer interfaces.
Develop computer based instrumentation tools
- Understand advanced methods for PC based and embedded
control system development.
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
15*27=405
Course Number
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4122
ECEG-4123
15
Lecture
96
Tutorial
Lab/prac
48
96
Course Name
VLSI Design
200
Home study
165
ECTS
5
5
5
September 2012

Pre-requisites:
Engineering
Systems
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Interfacing and control
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Contents

General Principles
Output Presentation
Semiconductor
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
1.1 Definitions
1.4 Types of Error
1.7 Limiting Errors
Chapter Objective
Time
Allotted
Errors
201

CHAPTER 2
Instruments
Galvanometer
2.3 Permanent .Magnet moving
coil mechanism (PMMC)
2.5 DC Ammeters
2.6 DC Voltmeters
2.12 Calibration of Dc
Instruments
CHAPTER 3
Instruments
3.1 Introduction
Measurements
3.8 Watt-hour meter
CHAPTER 4
Transducers
4.3 Strain Gages
CHAPTER 5
systems
To
understand
application
of
Instruments.
September 2012
principles
and 4 weeks
DC
indicating
4 weeks
application
of
AC
indicating
Instruments such as
Electrodynamometer
Thermo-instruments
3 weeks
applications of
2 weeks
tape recorders.
working.
202

5.5 Multiplexing
CHAPTER 6
Oscilloscopes
6.1 Introduction
6.5 Delay line
Literature
September 2012
1 week
of CRO and CRT.

(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Feedback
203
September 2012

Course Title:
Pre-requisites:
Microcomputers and Interfacing: 3(2,1,2)
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives & Competences This course is designed to impart in-depth knowledge
to be Acquired
in the design, programming and organization of
and Signals). This course completely covers the
popular Intel P 8086, which would be a steppingstone for learning the X 86 families of microprocessors.
At the end of the course the students would be capable
of:
microprocessors.
peripherals to PC.
Developing
Interfacing
Applications
using
Centronic and COM ports
Fundamentals
of
Microprocessors
and
Contents
Microcomputers
programming: Stacks, Subroutines, Input/Output,
Programmable
Interrupt
Controller
(PIC);
Contents
Chapter Objective
204
Time Allotted
September 2012
CHAPTER 1
An Introduction To
Microprocessor And Computer

students are able
To get history of
Microprocessor And
Computer.
Microprocessor and
Computer.
2 week
CHAPTER 2
2.3 Bus systems
organization

students are able
To explore the 8086
this would be a steppingstone for learning the X 86
families of microprocessors.
3 week
CHAPTER 3
programming
3.3 Stacks
3.4 Subroutines
3.5 Input /Output
3.6 Interrupts

students are able
microprocessors.
3 week
CHAPTER 4
Interfacing
Controller (PIC)
Interface (PPI)
Transmitter (USART)
(PIT)
Personal Computers.

students are able
interfacing various
peripherals to PC.
and COM ports
205
4 week

CHAPTER 5

Literature
September 2012

students are able
systems using the Intel
family of microprocessors

Textbook:
References:
Douglas V Hall, Microprocessors and InterfacingProgramming and Hardware, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
NewDelhi-2002.
Ramesh S Gaonkar, Microprocessor Programming
and Interfacing using 8085, Penram Publications,
4th Edition, 2003
A.K.Ray, K.M.Bhurchandy, Intel MicroprocessorsArchitecture, Programming and Interfacing,
McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2004
206
September 2012

Wolaita Sodo university, College of Engineering
Course Title: VLSI Design : 3 (2,1,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3102:Computer Architecture and
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Course Objective:
To acquaint the student with VLSI concepts
To enable the student design , simulate and test
ASICs
To acquaint the student with hardware description
language
Be able to use mathematical methods and circuit
analysis models in analysis of CMOS digital
electronics circuits, including logic components and
their interconnect.
Be able to create models of moderately sized CMOS
circuits that realize specified digital functions.
Be able to use hardware design languages such as
VHDL.
Be able to complete a significant VLSI design
project having a set of objective criteria and design
constraints
Course Description:
Introduction to VLSI. Programmable ASICs.
Hardware Description Languages. Simulation. Logic
Synthesis. Tests. ASIC Construction
Course Outline:
Introduction to VLSI: Digital systems and VLSI;
Gate Arrays; Standard Cells; Functional Blocks;
CMOS Logic
Programmable ASICs: ASIC Library Design ;
Programmable ASIC Logic Cells; Programmable
ASIC I/O Cells; Programmable ASIC Interconnect;
Programmable ASIC Design Software
Hardware Description Languages: VHDL; Verilog
HDL; C Based Languages
Simulation: Logic Simulation and Modeling; Fault
Simulation
Logic Synthesis: Timing Simulation and
Verification; Placement and Routing; Layout
Extraction
Tests: Design for Testability; Test Program
Development; Prototype Evaluation
ASIC Construction: Floorplanning And Placement;
Interconnects and Routing
207

Literature
September 2012

Textbook:
References:
Digital Integrated Circuits, Jan M. Rabaey,
Anantha Chandrakasan and Borivoje Nikolic
Application-Specific Integrated Circuits, 1997, M.
John, S. Smith Modern
VLSI Design System-on-Chip Design, Prentice
Hall, 2002, Wayne Wolf
Principles of CMOS VLSI Design Neil H. E.
Weste, et al.
HDL Chip Design, Donne Publishing, 1996, J.
Smith
208
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
13
Data Storage and Data Communication
This module handles the advanced and the fundamental principles
involved in the systematic representation, storage and management of
data and in the design and analysis of algorithms for the efficient
manipulation and processing of the data. This module gives enough
foundation for the computer engineering students for developing
applications for processing data in an efficient manner. This module
gives the students a profound ground for the analysis, design and
implementation of database systems, introduce students to networking
concepts, terminologies, technologies and applications. Data
communication and computer networks lay the foundations for further
courses dealing with advanced aspects of computer networking. The
course in the module covers low speed and high speed networks
hardware and software, OSI reference model, TCP/IP model, and other
standard Data communication networks.
Learn the fundamental data structures like arrays, queues, stacks,
linked lists, trees, etc.
Learn the application of the aforementioned structures
Learn the use of specialized data structures in problem solving
Gain knowledge of concept of parallel computation
Comprehend the concept of database systems and modeling
techniques
Gain a profound ground for the analysis, design and
implementation of database systems
Learn the advanced database types and issues related to storage
and security
Learn the fundamental Data Communication Principles.
Learn the topologies, protocols of low speed and high speed
networks.
Learn the OSI and TCP/IP Models of networks.
Learn the various Encoding Schemes used in the Data Networks.
Learn and Practice the Error Control and Flow Control Protocols
and Algorithms
Practice network programming using Sockets
Lay enough foundation for the Network Security aspects.
Learn various routing protocols and algorithms.
Total ECTS of
the module
Time allocation
15*27=405
Course Number
ECEG-4131
15
Lecture
96
Tutorial
Lab/prac
48
96
Course Name
Data Structures
209
Home study
165
ECTS
5

ECEG-4132
ECEG-4133
September 2012
Database Systems
Data communication and Computer Networks
5
5

Wolaita Soddo University, College of Engineering
Course Title: Data Structures : 3 (2,1,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECE-3103: Object-Oriented Programming
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Data Storage and Data
Communication
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To provide profound knowledge of the various data

structures together with their implementation and
associated operations.
To make the student able to use existing data
structures and to create a new one.
Data Structures and Operations in Data Structures
Arrays
Memory Allocation; Operations in Arrays
Linked Lists
Memory Allocation; Operations in Linked Lists;
Variation of Linked Lists: Circular, Doubly-Linked
Stacks and Queues
Stacks: Definition, Implementation, and
Application; Queues: Definition, Implementation,
and Application
Trees
Definition and Implementation; Type of Trees:
Binary, Binary Search, Heap, Application of Trees
Graphs
Definition and Implementation; Application of
Graphs Sorting and Searching Sorting Algorithms;
Searching Algorithms
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
1.1.Introduction to data structures
and operations
1.2.Data Structure
1.3.Operations in Data Structures
CHAPTER 2
Arrays
Chapter Objective
Time
Allotted
1 week
Provide overview of Data

structures and operations.
2 weeks
Apply the use of arrays in
210

2.1.Introduction
2.2.Memory Allocation in arrays
2.3.Operations in Arrays
CHAPTER 3
Linked Lists
3.1. Introduction to linked lists
3.2. Memory Allocation
3.3. Operations in Linked Lists
3.4. Variation of Linked Lists
3.4.1. Circular Linked lists
3.4.2. Doubly Linked lists
CHAPTER 4
Stacks and Queues
4.1.Introduction
4.2.Stacks:
4.2.1. Definition and description of stacks
4.2.2. Implementation of stacks
4.2.3. Application of stacks
4.3.Queues
4.3.1. Definition and description of queues
4.3.2. Implementation of queues
4.3.3. Application of queues
CHAPTER 5
Trees
5.1.Introduction to trees
5.2.Definition of trees
5.3.Implementation of trees
5.4.Type of Trees
5.4.1. Binary
5.4.2. Binary Search
5.4.3. Heap
5.5.Application of Trees
5.6. Trees and external storage
5.7.Red-Black trees
CHAPTER 6
Graphs
6.1.Introduction
6.2.Definition and description
6.3.Implementation of graphs
6.4.Application of Graphs
6.5.Sorting and Searching Algorithms
6.5.1. Sorting algorithms
6.5.2. Advanced sorting
6.5.3. Shell sort
6.5.4. Insertion sort: Too many copies
6.5.5. N-sorting
6.5.6. Searching Algorithms
6.6.Weighted graphs
September 2012
memory allocation and explain

how it works.
3 weeks
Introduce about linked lists.
Explain how linked lists operate
and apply it in data structures in
general.
3 weeks
Provide the basics of Stacks and
Queues in Data Structures
Applications of
queues and stacks
Implementations of
stacks and Queues.
Operation of stacks
and queues
3 weeks
Define trees with respect to
Data Structures.
Differentiate between types of
trees and their
Implementation
Application
3 weeks
To implement and apply
Graphs, and
Explain searching and
sorting algorithms
To
implement
searching and sorting
algorithms
.
211

CHAPTER 7
The recursive algorithm
7.1. Introduction
7.2. Eliminating recursion
7.3. Recursions and stacks
7.4. Simulating a recursive method
Literature
September 2012
1 Week
Convey the idea of recursive

algorithm.
Apply Recursions in stacks.
Simulate a recursive method
(40%)
Textbook:
..
References:
Data Structures in C and C++, by Yedidyah
Langsam, Moshe J. Augenstein, Aaron M.
Tanenbaum
Theory and Problems of Data Structures,
Seymour Lipschutz, Schaums's outline series
212
September 2012

Course Title: Database Systems : 3 (2,1,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3103: Object Oriented Programming
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Communication
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
Introduce the concept of database systems and

modeling techniques
Provide a profound ground for the analysis, design
and implementation of database systems
Discuss advanced database types and issues related
to storage and security
Fundamental concepts of a database systems
Introduction, historical perspective, Components
and functionality of a database system, types of
models, steps of database design
Conceptual level design
E/R model: Entities and relationships, attribute
types, key types, types of constraints, multiplicity
and participation, symbols, design guidelines, ODL
model: Syntax, OO concepts, ODL diagram,
comparison with E/R
Relational database design
Relations, dependencies, normal forms,
normalization steps, overall design process
Relational algebra
Simple operations and symbols, complex
operations, introduction to relational calculus
Structured query language (SQL)
Introduction, Constructs and their syntax,
Subqueries, Views, Embedded and Dynamic SQL
Data storage and query evaluation
File structure, indexing and hashing, query
evaluation
Security and integration
Assertions, triggers, security and authorization,
encryption and authentication
Introduction to distributed and parallel databases
Textbook:
Elmasri, Navathe: Fundamentals of Database
Systems
References:
Silbershatz, Korth, Sudarshan: Database system
213
September 2012
concepts
Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke: Database
management systems
H.C. Mollina, J.D. Ullman, J. Widom: Database
system, the complete book
Pervasive Software Inc., Database design guide
Course Title: Data Communication and
Pre-requisites:
Computer Networks : 3 (2,1,2)
Organization
Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Communication
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents
To introduce students to networking concepts,

technologies and terminologies.
To provide basic computer communication and
networking knowledge and lay the foundations for
further courses dealing with different aspects of
networking.
Model for data communication; protocols and
architectures OSI and TCP/IP; issues related to data
transmission-encoding, multiplexing, error and flow
controls; Local Area networks - technology, components
and topology; Internetworking with TCP/IP, IP
Addressing and Network Applications; Routing,
Switching and WAN technologies
Introduction: Concept of Communication,
Communication Model
Protocols and Architectures: Protocol
Characteristics, Implementation of protocols, OSIISO 7 Layer, TCP/IP
Data Encoding & Transmission: Digital and Analog
Signals, Transmission Media, Encoding Techniques,
Transmission Impairments
DLC and Multiplexing: Error Detection and Control,
Flow Control, Multiplexing
LAN technologies: ALOHA, Ethernet, Ethernet
Standards, Token Ring
LAN and Its Components: LAN Topology,
Repeaters/Hubs, Bridges/Switches, Routers
Internetworking: Internetworking concepts
Intranet, Extranet, Internet, Internetworking with
TCP/IP- IP Addressing, Subnetting, Masking,
Network Applications Web, Mail, DNS, DHCP
214
September 2012
Switching and Routing: Circuit Switching, Circuit

switching application, Packet Switching - Virtual
Packet Switching, Datagram Packet Switching,
Packet Switching application
Routing in Switched Networks: Introduction to
Routing, Graph Theory - Dijkstra Algorithm,
Bellman-Ford Algorithm, Routing Protocols
Distance Vector, Link State
WAN technologies: ISDN, X.25, Frame Relay,
ATM
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1.1 A Communications Model
Networking
CHAPTER 2
Protocols and Architectures
2.1 Protocol Characteristics
2.2 Implementation of protocols
2.3 OSI-ISO 7 Layer
2.4 TCP/IP
CHAPTER 3
Data Transmission & Encoding
3.1 Concepts and Terminology
3.2 Analog and Digital Data
Transmission
3.3 Transmission Impairments
3.4 Transmission media
2.4.1 Guided Transmission
Media
2.4.2 Wireless Transmission
3.5 Data Encoding
2.5.1 Digital Data, Digital
Signals
2.5.2 Digital Data, Analog
Signals
2.5.3 Analog Data, Digital
Signals
2.5.4 Analog Data, Analog
Signals
2.5.5 Spread Spectrum
CHAPTER 4
Data Link Control and
Multiplexing
4.1 Data Link Control
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
At the end of this chapter 1week
students are able
Study the different types of
modeling communication.
data communications and
networking.
students are able
To introduce protocols.
To understand the
importance of layered
approach and understand the
OSI reference model.
Understand the TCP/IP
2weeks
students are able
Analog and Digital Data
Transmission.
To understand the different
types of transmission media.
Discuss about data encoding
techniques.
2 weeks
students are able
To explore the different error
215

Flow Control
Error Detection
Error Control
High-Level Data Link
Control (HDLC)
4.1.5
Other Data Link Control
Protocols
4.2 Multiplexing
4.2.1
Frequency-Division
Multiplexing
4.2.2
Synchronous TimeDivision Multiplexing
4.2.3
Statistical TimeDivision Multiplexing
CHAPTER 5
Local Area Network (LAN)
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
5.1 LAN Topology

5.2 LAN technologies
5.2.1 ALOHA
5.2.2 Ethernet
5.2.3 Ethernet Standards
5.2.4 Token Ring
5.3 LAN Components
5.3.1 Repeaters/Hubs
5.3.2 Bridges/Switches
5.3.3 Routers
CHAPTER 6
Internetworking
6.1 Internetworking concepts
6.1.1 Intranet
6.1.2 Extranet
6.1.3 Internet
6.2 Internetworking with TCP/IP
6.2.1 IP Addressing
6.2.2 Subnetting
6.2.3 Masking
6.3 Network Applications
6.3.1 Web
6.3.2 Mail
6.3.3 DNS
6.3.4 DHCP
CHAPTER 7
Switching
7.1 Circuit Switching
7.2 Circuit switching application
7.3 Packet Switching
7.3.1 Virtual Packet
Switching
7.3.2 Datagram Packet
September 2012
detection, Flow Control &

Error Control methods.
To operate with data link
control protocols.
To differentiate between the
different types of
Multiplexing.

students are able
To Explain how LAN
technologies like ALOHA,
Ethernet, and Token Ring
Operate.
To work with
Repeaters/Hubs,
Bridges/Switches and
Routers.

students are able
To get knowledge about
Internetworking concepts.
Define Internetworking with
TCP/IP.
To work with IP Addressing
Subnetting.
Operate with Network
Applications like Web Mail,
DNS, and DHCP.

students are able
Circuit switching and Packet
Switching.
To analyze Circuit switching
application.
To Analyze Packet switching
216

Switching
7.4 Packet Switching application
CHAPTER 8
Routing in Switched Networks
8.1 Introduction to Routing
8.2 Graph Theory
8.2.1 Dijkstra Algorithm
8.2.2 Bellman-Ford
Algorithm
8.3 Routing Protocols
September 2012
application.

students are able
routing and routing protocol.
Work with Dijkstra
Algorithm and Bellman-Ford
Algorithm
.
CHAPTER 9
WAN technologies
9.1 ISDN
9.2 X.25
9.3 Frame Relay
9.4 ATM
Laboratory Exercise

Literature

students are able
To get an introduction to
WAN technologies.
Network Components - Interface Card and

Cables; Hardware and Software Installation
of Simple Type Network Systems; Protocol
Analysis using Software Tools.
Examination (40%)
attendance
Textbook:
William Stallings: Data & Computer
Communications
References:
Andrew S.Tanenbaum: Computer
Networks,
217
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
14
Programming and Software Engineering
Programming and Software Engineering module covers techniques,
methods and tools that is created to support the development of large
software systems based on sound engineering-principles. This module
handles the fundamental and advanced principles of Programming
Languages and the fundamental and advanced principles involved in the
systematic requirement collection, design, implementation, testing and
maintenance of software and software systems. During this module they
take the Software Engineering course, which has a comprehensive
treatment on state of the art coverage on all the stages of the software
development. This module gives the students a profound ground for the
analysis, design
Course in the module introduce students to the fundamentals of various
programming languages and their idiosyncrasies. The course in the
module covers all the programming language design and development
principles. The module also covers the fundamentals of the compiler
construction.
During the course of this module the graduate students will:
Learn the fundamental principles of Software Engineering.
Apply a range of software engineering techniques to develop
large software systems
Recognize and correct flaws in software design
Use appropriate UML technologies in software development
Use software metrics to understand and improve large software
systems
Understand the fundamental principles of distributed application
development
Demonstrate the ability to work professionally in a team
Develop a critical understanding and awareness of current trends
in software engineering and future software engineering trends.
Comprehend algorithm analysis methods
Be aware of guidelines for the design of efficient algorithms
Procure the increased ability to learn new programming
languages.
Develop background for choosing appropriate language suitable
for a particular problem solving and the application development.
Develop skills to design new programming languages.
Learn various Programming Language Paradigms
Learn Language Design Issues, Language Translation Issues, and
Sequence Control
218
September 2012
Learn Subprogram Control, Encapsulation, Inheritance, and

Concurrent Programming
Students will take up case studies of typical programming
Languages
Total ECTS of
the module
Time allocation
14*27=378
Course Number
ECEG- 5141
ECEG 5142
ECEG 5143
14
Lecture Tutorial
Lab/prac
Home study
112
96
16
154
Course Name
ECTS
Algorithm Analysis and Design
4
5
5
219
September 2012

Course Title: Algorithm Analysis and
Pre-requisites:
Design: 3 (2,2,1)
ECTS Credit: 4
Module: Programming and Software
Engineering
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature

Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA
To discuss and exemplify algorithm analysis
methods
Module Data Storage and Analysis computation
Algorithm analysis basics, Recurrences, Analysis of
Sorting & searching algorithms, Algorithm design
techniques, Graph Algorithms, String Processing
Algorithms, Problem complexity and type,
introduction to parallel computation.
Algorithm analysis basics
The running time of a program, Big-Oh, Omega
and Theta notations, lower bounds, worst and
average case analysis, time and space tradeoffs
Recurrences
Recurrences, Master Method
Analysis of Sorting and Searching algorithms
Analysis of Simple Algorithms: sorting,
searching; Analysis of Advanced Algorithms:
advanced trees, heaps, hash tables.
Algorithm design techniques
Brute force, Divide-and-conquer, dynamic
programming, greedy algorithms,
backtracking, branch and bound,
amortized analysis.
Algorithms for fundamental graph problems
Depth-first search, connected components,
topological sort, and shortest paths.
String processing algorithms
Problem complexity and type
Complexity of problems, tractable and intractable
problems, Introduction to parallel computation
Textbook:
References:
220
September 2012
Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest : Introduction to

Algorithms
Robert Sedgwick, Algorithms in C/C++
Aho, Hopcroft, Ullman: The Design & Analysis of
Computer Algorithms

Course Title:
Pre-requisites:
Programming Languages : 3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-3103 : Object Oriented Programming
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Engineering
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
To provide students with a working knowledge of

the basic constructs of all computer programming
languages, and how these constructs are used to
support programming under various programming
paradigms.
Students completing this course should be able to
quickly learn to effectively use new computer
programming languages.
Introduction: Definition of programming language,
Role of programming languages, Why study
programming languages, Attributes of good
programming language
Language Design Issues: Programming
environment, Virtual Computers and Binding
Times, Language Paradigms
Language Translation Issues: Programming
Language syntax, Stages in Translation, Formal
Translation Models
Data Types: Properties of Types and Objects,
Elementary Data Types, Structured Data Types
Abstraction I: Encapsulation; Abstract Data Types,
Encapsulation by subprograms, Type Definitions
Abstraction II: Inheritance; Generic Abstract Data
Types, Inheritance, Polymorphism
Sequence Control: Implicit and Explicit sequence
Control, Sequencing with Arithmetic Expression,
Sequencing with Non-arithmetic Expression,
Sequence control between statements
Subprogram Control: Subprogram Sequence
control, Attributes of Data Control, Parameter
Transmission, Shared Data in subprograms
221

Literature
September 2012
Concurrency and Parallelism: Concept,

Communication, Threads, Synchronization
Textbook:
References
Programming Languages: Design and
Implementation
Terrence W.Pratt and Marvin V.Zelkowitz
Programming Language Landscape
Michael Marcotty and H. F.Ledgard
Programming Languages: Concepts and
Constructs, Ravi Sethi
Concepts in Programming Language, John
C.Mitchel
Essentials of Programming Language, MIT Press
Programming Languages: Theory and Practice,
Robert Harper
222
September 2012

Course Title: Software Engineering: 2
Pre-requisites:
(3,1,0)
ECTS Credit:5
Semester: IX/9
Module Coordinator: N.N.
Engineering
Lecturer: N.N.
to be Acquired
Contents

Literature
The student will be acquainted with the classical

and Object oriented Software engineering
paradigms.
Enables them to work in large software projects and
to work in teams.
Apply Object Oriented Software development
techniques
Introduction to Software Engineering
Basic concepts, the software crisis, software life
cycle models etc
Conventional methods for software Engineering
Analysis, design, implementation, module testing,
integration and system testing, maintenance etc..
Object Oriented Software Engineering
Object oriented concepts and principles; Object
Oriented Analysis; Object Oriented Design
Object Oriented Implementation; Object Oriented
Testing
Software project planning and estimation
Software metrics, cost, time and resource
estimation, team organization, etc
Textbook:
References
Software Engineering , A practionerss Approach-Roger S. Pressman
Fundamentals of Software EngineeringCarlo
Ghezzi; Mehdi Jazayeri; Dino Mandrioli
Classical and Object-Oriented Software
Engineering with UML
223
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
15
Control and Automation
This module handles fundamental issues in operating system design and
implementation. The module cover the tradeoffs that can be made
between performance and functionality during the design and
implementation of an
Operating system. Particular emphasis will be given to the major OS
subsystems: process management (processes, threads, CPU scheduling,
synchronization, and deadlock), memory management (segmentation,
paging), file systems, I/O management, and networking/distributed
systems.
The course gives an in depth study of various protection and security
aspects of the operating systems.
This module also covers the fundamental issues in the Embedded System
design and development, robotics and Industrial automation
Fundamentals; Mechanisms and Actuators, Sensors and Detectors;
Modelling and Control of Manipulators; Robot Applications and
Programming; Review of Industrial Control Devices and Circuits; Basic
Ladder Logic and Control; Programmable Logic Controllers and
Applications.
The embedded system course in the module is designed to provide
students a working knowledge of Embedded Systems their Design and
Programming at an Introduction level. In this module the fundamentals
of embedded systems, hardware and firmware designs will be explored.
Issues such as embedded microcontrollers, embedded programs, realtime operating systems, low power computing, interfacing as well as
optimization, will be discussed.
During the courses of this module the students will:
-
know the role of embedded systems

Understand the concepts, components both hardware and
software of embedded systems
Know the design and development processes of embedded
systems.
Understand the elements of an industrial robot, mechanisms,
sensors, actuators and end effectors.
Program robotic manipulators- Acquaintance with artificial
intelligence applications in robotics
Be introduced to industrial control circuits and applications of
PLCs in modern industrial control
Design embedded control applications.
Develop skills to use embedded systems based control
224

-
Learn how the Distributed and Network Operating Systems are

organized and their components.
Analyse performance of various algorithms on different

platforms.
Practice Inter Process Communication using sockets and other
APIs
Practice various Classic Problems to explain operating system
algorithms using threads.
Course Number
ECEG- 5151
ECEG-5152
ECEG-5153
applications.
Learn basic principles and components of an Operating System,
Learn and be familiar with the notion of processes,
Understand CPU scheduling, deadlock detection and avoidance,
Understand how memory management and file systems are
handled and implemented
Total ECTS of
the module
Time allocation
15*27=405
September 2012
15
Lecture
144
Tutorial
Lab/prac
Home study
16
80
165
Course Name
Operating Systems
Embedded Systems
Introduction to Robotics and Industrial Automation
225
ECTS
5
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Operating Systems : 3 (3,1,1)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-4131: Data Structures
ECEG-3103: Computer Architecture &
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Module: Control and Automation
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Learn basic principles and components of an

Operating System,
Learn and be familiar with the notion of processes,
Understand CPU scheduling, deadlock detection
and avoidance,
Understand how memory management and file
systems are handled and implemented
This course examines fundamental issues in operating
system design and implementation. The discussion is
to cover the tradeoffs that can be made between
performance and functionality during the design and
implementation of an operating system. Particular
emphasis will be given to the major OS subsystems:
process management (processes, threads, CPU
scheduling, synchronization, and deadlock), memory
management (segmentation, paging, swapping), file
systems, I/O management, and networking/distributed
systems.
Introduction
What is an operating system, Early Systems,
Simple Batch Systems, Multiprogramming,
Batched Systems, Time-Sharing Systems,
Personal-Computer Systems, Parallel Systems,
Distributed Systems, and Real-Time Systems?
Hardware Structures
Computer-System Operation, I/O Structure,
Storage Structure, Storage Hierarchy, Hardware
Protection, General System Architecture.
Operating System Structures
System Components, Operating-System Services,
System Calls, System Programs, System Structure,
Virtual Machines, System Design and
Implementation, System Generation
Processes
Process Concepts, Process Scheduling, Operation
on Processes, Cooperating Processes, Threads,
Inter-process Communication
226
September 2012
CPU Scheduling
Basic Concepts, Scheduling Criteria, Scheduling
Algorithms, Multiple-Processor Scheduling, RealTime Scheduling, Algorithm Evaluation.
Synchronization
Background, The Critical-Section Problem,
Synchronization Hardware, Semaphores, Classical
Problems of Synchronization, Critical Regions,
Monitors.
Deadlocks
System Model, Deadlock Characterization,
Methods for Handling Deadlocks, Deadlock
Prevention, Deadlock Avoidance, Deadlock
Detection, Recovery from Deadlock, Combined
Approach to Deadlock Handling.
Memory Management
Background, Logical versus Physical Address
Space, Swapping, Contiguous Allocation, Paging,
Segmentation, Segmentation with Paging.
File Systems
Concepts, Access Methods, Directory Structure,
Protection, Consistency Semantics, File-System
Structure, Allocation Methods, Free-Space
Management, Directory Implementation,
Efficiency and Performance, Recovery.
Secondary Storage Structure
Disk Structure, Disk Scheduling, Disk
Management, Swap-Space Management, Disk
Reliability, Stable-Storage Implementation.
Protection and Security
Goals of Protection, Domain of Protection, Access
Matrix, The Security Problem, Authentication,
Program Threats, System Threats, Threat
Monitoring, Encryption
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Over view of operating systems
1.1 What is operating system?
1.2 OS and Computer system
1.2.1 Computer hardware
review.
1.2.1.1 Processors
1.2.1.2 Memory
1.2.1.3 Disks
1.2.1.4 Tapes
1.2.1.5 I/O devices
1.2.1.6 Buses
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
2 week
To understand what an
operating system is and
what function to do.
To review the computer
hardware like processor,
227

1.3 Classes of Operating system
1.3.1 Batch processing
Systems
1.3.2 Multiprogramming
Systems
1.3.3 Time Sharing Systems
1.3.4 Real time operating
systems
1.3.5 Distributed operating
systems
1.3.6 Modern operating
systems
CHAPTER 2
Operating System Structures
2.1 Operating system services
2.2 User operating system interface
2.3 System calls
2.4 System programs
2.5 Operating system structures
2.6 Virtual machines
2.7 Operating system generation
2.8 Booting the computer
CHAPTER 3
Processes
1.1 Process Concepts
1.2 Process Scheduling
1.3 Operation on Processes
1.4 Threads
1.5 Inter-process Communication
CHAPTER 4
CPU Scheduling
4.1 Basic Concepts
4.2 Scheduling Criteria
4.3 Scheduling Algorithms
4.4 Multiple-Processor Scheduling
4.5 Real-Time Scheduling
4.6 Algorithm Evaluation
CHAPTER 5
Synchronization
5.1 Background
5.2 The Critical-Section Problem
September 2012
memory, disks, tapes, I/O

devices and buses.
To study the different
classes
of
operating
system.
1 week
To discuss the operating

system services, interfaces,
and structures.
Define the various system
calls
1 week
To understand the concept of

processes.
To Explain treads of process
in detail.
To analyze Inter-process
Communication
1 week
Based on different types of

criteria to schedule a process
to be executed by the CPU.
1 week
To state synchronization
228

5.3 Synchronization Hardware
5.4 Semaphores
5.5 Classical Problems of
Synchronization
5.6 Critical Regions
5.7 Monitors
CHAPTER 6
Deadlocks
6.1 Introduction
6.2 System Model
6.3 Deadlock Characterization
6.4 Methods for Handling
Deadlocks
6.5 Deadlock Detection
6.6 Deadlock Prevention
6.7 Deadlock Avoidance
6.8 Recovery from Deadlock
6.9 Combined Approach to
Deadlock Handling
CHAPTER 7
Memory Management
7.1 Background
7.2 Logical versus Physical
Address Space
7.3 Swapping
7.4 Contiguous Allocation
7.5 Paging
7.6 Segmentation
7.7 Segmentation with Paging.
CHAPTER 8
File Systems
8.1 File system concepts
8.1.1 File Concepts
8.1.2 Access Methods
8.1.3 Directory Structure
8.1.4 File system mounting
8.1.5 File sharing
8.1.6 Protection
8.2 File system implementation
8.2.1 File-System Structure
8.2.2 File system
implementation
8.2.3 Directory Implementation
September 2012
Techniques.
To explain Semaphores
2 week
To study deadlock in detail.

To explore Detection of
Deadlock
Deadlock Prevention,
Deadlock Avoidance,
Recovery from Deadlock
and deadlock handling.
2 week
To manage memory for

efficient effective and fast
operation.
To study the different
techniques of managing
memory.
2 week
To understand the concept of

file system.
To explain file system
structure, file system
implementation and
229

8.2.4 Allocation Methods
8.2.5 Free-Space Management
8.2.6 Efficiency and
Performance, Recovery
CHAPTER 9
Secondary Storage Structure
9.1 Secondary Storage Structure
9.2 Disk Structure
9.3 Disk Scheduling
9.4 Disk Management
9.5 Swap-Space Management
9.6 RAID Structure
9.7 Stable-Storage Implementation
CHAPTER 10
Protection and Security
10.1 Goals of Protection
10.2 Domain of Protection
10.3 Access
Matrix
10.4 The Security Problem
10.5 Authentication
10.6 Program Threats
10.7 System Threats
10.8 Threat Monitoring
10.9 Encryption
Literature
September 2012
directory implementation.
1 week
To explore secondary
storage structure.
To study disk scheduling and
disk management.
2 week
To deal the problem of

protection and security.
To study treats of a program
and system.
To explore methods of
protection and security.

Textbook:
Silberschatz, A and Galvin, P: Operating System
Concepts
References:
Tanenbaum, A.S: Modern Operating Systems
230
September 2012

Course Title: Embedded Systems: 3 (3,0,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-4122: Microcomputers & Interfacing,
ECEG-5151: Operating Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
The objective of this course is to impart students for a

solid understanding of
role of embedded systems
concepts, components both hardware and software
of embedded systems
design and development processes of embedded
systems
This course is designed to provide students a working
knowledge of Embedded Systems their Design and
Programming at an Introduction level. In this course
the fundamentals of embedded systems, hardware and
firmware designs will be explored. Issues such as
embedded microcontrollers, embedded programs, realtime operating systems, low power computing,
interfacing as well as optimization, will be discussed.
Introduction
Why Study Embedded System, Contrast between
embedded systems and other computer systems, role
and purpose of embedded systems
Embedded Microcontrollers
Structure of a basic computer system, CPU families
used in microcontrollers, Basic I/O devices and
technologies, Interrupts and Memories
Embedded Programs
Program translation process, representation of
programs and their execution flow, fundamentals of
assembly language and linking, mapping tasks in
compilation
Real-time Operating systems
Context switching mechanisms, scheduling policies,
message passing and shared memory
communications, inter-process communication
Low-power Computing
Sources of energy consumption, instruction-level
strategies for power management, memory system
power consumption, system-level power
management
231
Laboratory Exercise

Literature
September 2012
Reliable System Design

Failures in hardware, sources of errors from
software, design verification and its role, faulttolerant techniques
Design Methodologies and Tools
Design Methodology, RTOS Tools, Logic
analyzers, Compilers and Programming
environments, Software management Tools
Networked Embedded Systems
Why networked embedded systems, examples of
networked embedded systems
Interfacing and Mixed-signal systems
D/A and A/D conversions, how to partition A/D
processing in interfaces
Assembly Programming; Programming with chips;
Clocking/Interrupts/Timers; A/D, D/A conversions and
processing
Textbook:
Arnold S. Berger: Embedded Systems Design
References:
Stuart R. Ball: Embedded Microprocessor Systems:
Real World Design
Michael Barr: Programming Embedded Systems in
C and C ++,
Qing Li, Caroline Yao: Real-Time Concepts for
Embedded Systems
232
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Robotics and
Pre-requisites:
Industrial Automation: 3 (3,0,2)
Engineering
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
Laboratory Exercise
Understand the elements of an industrial robot,

mechanisms, sensors, actuators and end effectors.
Program robotic manipulators
Acquaintance with artificial intelligence
applications in robotics
Introduce industrial control circuits and
applications of PLCs in modern industrial control
knowledge of: Robot Fundamentals; Mechanisms and
Actuators, Sensors and Detectors; Modeling and
Control of Manipulators; Robot Applications and
Programming; Review of Industrial Control Devices
and Circuits; Basic Ladder Logic and Control;
Programmable Logic Controllers and Applications.
Robotic Fundamentals
Introduction, Robot kinematics; rigid body motion;
transformation of coordinates
Mechanisms and Actuators
Sensors and Detectors
Position, Velocity, Acceleration, Force torque;
Touch and Tactile Sensors; Proximity and Range
Detectors, Machine Vision
Modeling and Control of Manipulators
Newtons equations; Euler Lagrange method;
motion control; manipulator control; trajectory
generation; computer control
Robot Applications and Programming
Pick and place; spot and arc welding; surface
coating; assembly
Review of Industrial Control Devices and
Electronics
Basic Ladder Logic and Control
Programmable Logic Controllers and Applications
Static Calibration of Instruments, Sensor Applications,
Motion control; manipulator control; machine learning
using MATLAB and relevant tools; PLC
Programming
233

Literature
September 2012

Textbook:
M. W. Spong and M. Vidyasagar., Wiley, New
York, 1989: Robot Dynamics and Control
References:
P.J. McKerrow, Addison-Wesley, 1991:
Introduction to Robotics.
Sciavicco, L., and Siciliano, B., Springer-Verlag
Advanced Textbooks in Control and Signal
Processing Series, London, UK, 2000: Modeling
and Control of Robot Manipulators, 2nd Ed.
Canudas de Wit, Siciliano and Bastin, SpringerVerlag London Limited, 1996: Theory of Robot
Control.
Asada, H. and Slotine, J.-J. E., J. Wiley and Sons,
1986: Robot Analysis and Control.
Murray, R., Li, Z. and Sastry, S. CRC Press, 1994:
A mathematical introduction to robotic
manipulation.
Robin R. Murphy: Introduction to AI Robotics
234
September 2012
Industrial Control Focus Modules and Courses

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
12
Electric Power and Drives
The module Electric Power and Drives deals with electrical installation
design and construction, Electrical power transmission analysis, electrical
machines, drives and power electronics. The students get knowledge and
ability to work in areas of power and develop control systems for these
areas.
Total ECTS of the
- Understand the science and art of internal and external illumination of

buildings.
- Know electrical regulations and standards for consumer premises wiring
design, drawing and construction.
- Get familiar with fundamentals of power systems and learn modeling of
power system components for power transmission and distribution.
- Understand analytical methods for calculation of line parameters.
- Understand operation and design aspects of transformers.
- Gain knowledge and understand D.C. armature winding & A.C.
windings.
- Understand dynamic equations and control aspect of D.C machines.
- Gain knowledge and comprehend salient pole synchronous machine
features, reference frame transformation, d-q axis theory, power/load
angle relationship and carry out transient analysis.
- Understand the principle of operation and construction of fractional
horsepower motors.
- Gain knowledge of elements and operating characteristics, and operation
principles of electric drives
- Be able to select drive elements and develop drive system for common
industrial driven units
- Gain insight into technologies of conventional and non-conventional
power plants, renewable energy resources and technologies.
19
235

module
Time allocation
19*27=513
Course Number
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4122
ECEG-4123
ECEG-5124
Lecture
128
September 2012
Tutorial
Lab/pract
160
32
Course Name
Power Systems I
Electrical Machines
Power Electronics and Electric Drives
236
Home study
193
ECTS
5
5
5
4
September 2012

Course Title: Electrical Installation : 3 (2,3,0) Pre-requisites:
ECEG-2093: Electrical Workshop Practice II
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Module: Electric Power and Drives
to be Acquired
Course Description/Course Contents

Literature

Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
The course aims to enable students to:
know the science and art of internal and external
illumination of buildings
understand electrical regulations and standards for
consumer premises wiring design and construction
know contracting documentations and design and
construction drawings
Illumination
Electrical installation in the consumer premises
Electrical installation cost estimation
Electrical construction contracting
Lectures, tutorials, students presentations on mini
projects
Textbook:
References:
IEE regulations
Ethiopian Building Code Standard, Electrical
Installation of Buildings EBCS-10
Electrical Installation Work by Brian Scaddan third
edition
Electrical Installation Principles and Practices by J.
Hyde
The art and science of illumination by Abdella
237
September 2012
Abdinaser

Course Title: Power Systems I 3(2 3 0)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3091:
Introduction
Machines
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
to
Electrical
The course aims to introduce students to the fundamentals

of power systems.
fundamentals of power systems and modeling power
system components for power transmission and
distribution.
The students will be able to understand analytical
methods for calculation of line parameters.
The students will be able to understanding of
performance analysis of transmission lines, cable
and overhead line insulators.
The students will be able to comprehend analysis of
symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults in power
systems.
Course Description/Course Contents Fundamentals of power systems
AC and DC transmission
Single-phase and three-phase transmission
Complex power
Structure of a power system Introduction to power
transformers, CTs and PTs etc.
Representation of power system components
Single-phase solution of balanced three-phase
networks
One-line diagram and impedance or reactance
diagram
Per unit (PU) system.
Transmission line parameters
238
September 2012
Resistance of transmission lines.

Skin effect and proximity effect.
Inductance of single-phase two-wire line, composite
conductor lines, three-phase line with
unsymmetrical spacing, double circuit three-phase
lines and bundled conductors.
Capacitance of a two-wire line, three-phase line with
equilateral and unsymmetrical spacing, effect of
earth on transmission line capacitance.
Mechanical design of transmission lines
Sag and tension calculations
Effect of wind and ice
Stringing chart
Sag template.
Characteristic and performance of power transmission
lines
ABCD constants
Representation of transmission lines
Short, medium and long transmission lines
Steady-state performance efficiency and
regulation.
Corona
Disruptive critical voltage
Corona loss
Line design based on corona Advantages and
disadvantages of corona.
Overhead line insulators
Types of insulators
Potential distribution over a string of insulators
Methods of equalizing potential.
Underground cables
Types of cables
Capacitance of single-core and three-core cables
Insulation resistance of a cable
Power factor and heating of cables.
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Power Generation
1.5 Introduction
1.6 Generation of Electricity
Chapter Objectives
Time Allotted
Introduces the main sources of 2 Weeks
Electrical Power.
Describe the comparison of d/t
239

1.7 Sources of Electrical Power
1.8 Comparison of Sources Power
CHAPTER 2
Elements of Transmission and
Distribution
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Transmission of electrical
energy
- DC and AC
2.3 Systems of Transmission
2.4 Power Scheme (typical)
CHAPTER 3
Constants of Transmission Line
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Concepts of Electromagnetism
3.3 Magnetic Field intensity
3.4 Inductance of
- Parallel Conductor
- 3 line
3.5 Transposition
3.6 Capacitance
- 1 and 3
3.7 Resistance
3.8 Skin Effect
3.9 Proximity Effect
CHAPTER 4
Short Transmission Lines
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Capacitance Effect
4.3 Inductance Effect
- Normal T method
- Normal Method
CHAPTER 5
Long Transmission Lines
5.1 Introduction
- Differential equation
- Derived line Constants
- Parallel Circuits
September 2012
source power plants with respect

to cost, Pollution and Space
2 Weeks
Describe how long distance
transmission of Electrical energy
is achieved.
Introduce the typical
transmission scheme.
power
3 Weeks
Convey
the
basics
of
electromagnetism in Transmission
Lines.
Determine various Transmission
Line
Parameters
such
as
Inductance,
Capacitance
and
Resistance for d/t single-phase and
three-Phase systems.
Calculate the magnetic field
intensity with in a round strait
conductor.
2 Weeks
Define the circuit representation of
Short Transmission Line.
Introduce
to
methods
calculation for Short T.L.
of
2 Weeks
Define Circuit representation of
Long Transmission Lines.
Calculate the Impedance
Different Long T.L. setups
240
for

- Series Circuits
5.3 Two-port Network
- ABCD parameters
CHAPTER 6
Overhead Lines
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Types of Conductors
6.3 Line Supports
- Span
6.8 Sag and Tension
6.9 Over head line Insulators
- Materials of Insulators
- Types of Insulators
6.10 Effect of Wind and Ice
6.11 Corona
CHAPTER 7
Cables
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Classification of Cables
7.3 Cable Conductors
7.4 Cable Construction
- Insulation
7.5 Insulation Resistance
7.6 Capacitance of Cables
- Single Core
- Three Core
Literature
September 2012
2 Weeks
Define the basic mechanical
properties of Overhead Lines.
Calculate, the spacing, sag, tension
of Overhead lines for HV, MV,
and LV.
2 Weeks
Identify the advantages
disadvantages of UG cables.
and
Calculate the UG cable parameters

such as insulation resistance and
capacitance.

(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Edition, 2002.
C. L. Wadhwa, Electrical Power Systems, New
Age International Publishers, 2004.
241
September 2012
Syed Nasar, Electrical Power systems, Schaums

Outline Series, McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company, 2004.
Dr. George G. Karady, Dr. Keith E. Holbert,
Electrical Energy Conversion and Transport: An
Interactive Computer-Based Approach, WileyIEEE Press, 2005.
Course Title: Electrical Machines : 3 (2,3,0)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3091: Introduction to Electrical
Machines (Co-requisite)
Course Number ECEG-4123
ECTS Credit: 5
to be Acquired

Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
The course aims to enable students:
Understand the basic principles of
electromechanical energy conversion devices.
Know and understand inrush currents, harmonics
and conditions for parallel operation and design
aspects of transformers.
Understand D.C. armature winding & A.C.
windings.
Understand dynamic equations and control aspect of
D.C machines.
Know salient pole synchronous machine features,
reference frame transformation, d-q axis theory,
power/load angle relationship and carry out
transient analysis.
Understand the principle of operation and
construction of fractional horsepower motors.
Principle of electromechanical energy conversion
Transformer
Induction machine
D.C machines
Synchronous machines
Fractional horsepower motors
242

Literature
September 2012
Lectures, tutorials, lab demonstration seminar/ project &

assignments
Textbook:
References:
McGraw-Hill
Machinery
Applications
243
September 2012

Course Title: Power Electronics and Electric
Pre-requisites:
Drives : 3 (2,1,2)
ECEG-4123: Electrical Machines
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 4

Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired

fundamentals of power electronics and drives.
The students will be able to understand elements
and characteristics, and operation principles of
electric drives.
understanding of the desired operating
characteristics of various industrial driven units.
The students will be able to select drive elements
and develop drive system for common industrial
driven units.
Introduction
Basic elements of electric drives
Torque-speed characteristics of industrial driven
units
Torque-speed characteristics of electric motors
Power supply for electric motors
Control of electric drives.
Dynamic behavior of electric drives
Torques acting in a drive system
Referring torque and moment of inertia from one
axis to other axis
Energy losses in transient
Operation of electric motors in motoring and
braking modes
Starting of electric motors, etc.
Power converters to supply electric drives
244
September 2012
Semiconductor devices
Single-phase AC-DC converters
Three-phase AC-DC converters
DC-DC converters
Single-phase and three-phase DC-AC inverters
AC-AC converters
Control circuits for power converters.
Electric drives and Control

Electric drive system model
Controller design for DC motors, Induction motors,
and Brushless DC motors
Feedback elements.
Motor rating selection
Heating and motor power rating
Load diagram
Motor selection for continuous duty, intermittent
duty and short time duty.
Characteristics of electric drives for common applications
Crane and hoist drives
Centrifugal pumps
Steel rolling mills, cement mills and sugar mills
Electric machine tools and turbo compressors, etc.
Lecture, tutorial and laboratory exercises

Literature

Textbook:
References:
Vedam Subrahmanyam: Electric Drives Concepts and
applications by, McGraw-Hill 1996.
Electric Drive by Jacob Feinberg, Mir Publishers,
1978
Industrial Brushless servos by Peter Moreton,
Newnes, 2000
245
September 2012

Woalita Sodo University
Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
13
Instrumentation and Control
Module Instrumentation and Control enables to equip students with
fundamentals of instrumentation and control up to detailed analysis and
engineering design of instruments including sensors, signal conditioning
Circuits, signal conversion elements, output presentation.
- Understand the basic operational principles and limitations of
electrical and electronic instruments.

- Be able to analyze and compare commercial instruments and design
-
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
20*27=540
Course Number
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4132
ECEG-5133
ECEG-5134
similar systems under given constraints.

Understand and be able to develop and analyze state space models of
control systems.
Gain insight into design, analysis and synthesis of controllers using
state space methods.
Learn modern control systems fundamentals, modelling, analysis and
controller design both in analogue and discrete.
Learn digital implementation of the classical control systems.
20
Lecture
128
Tutorial
Lab/pract
96
96
Course Name
246
Home study
220
ECTS
5
5
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Instrumentation : Pre-requisites: ECEG-3111: Introduction to
3 (2,1,2)
Control Engineering
Systems
Organization
(co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Contents
CHAPTER 1

To analyze and compare commercial instruments and
General Principles
Characteristics Static and Dynamic; Noise and
Interference in Instrumentations
Passive Sensors: Resistive, Capacitive, Inductive;
Active Sensors and Applications; Discrete Output
Output Presentation
Semiconductor
Chapter Objective
Time
Allotted
247
September 2012

1.1 Definitions
1.4 Types of Error
1.7 Limiting Errors

Errors
CHAPTER 2
Direct Current Indicating Instruments
Galvanometer
mechanism (PMMC)
2.5 DC Ammeters
2.6 DC Voltmeters
CHAPTER 3
Instruments
3.1 Introduction
Measurements
3.8 Watt-hour meter
To
understand
application
of
Instruments.
principles
and 4 weeks
DC
indicating
4 weeks
application
of
AC
indicating
Instruments such as
Electrodynamometer
Thermo-instruments
248

CHAPTER 4
Transducers
4.3 Strain Gages
CHAPTER 5
systems
5.5 Multiplexing
CHAPTER 6
Oscilloscopes
6.1 Introduction
6.5 Delay line
Literature
September 2012
3 weeks

applications of
2 weeks
tape recorders.
Understand how DAC and ADC work.
1 week
of CRO and CRT.
Lectures supported by tutorials and practical laboratory

exercises.
Textbook:
References:
249
September 2012

Feedback
Course Title: Modern Control Systems: 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,3,0)
ECTS Credit: 5
to be Acquired

Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
Understand and develop State space representation
of control systems
Analyze system models in state space model
Design and synthesize controllers in state space
Mathematical modeling of control systems, Coordinate
transformation and solution to state equations, Stability,
Controllability, Observability of control systems,
Control systems design in state space, Introduction to
non-linear control systems, introduction to optimum
control. Continuous and discrete systems.
Mathematical modeling of control systems
Concepts of state, state-space representation of
systems, transformation from state-space
representation to transfer function, eigenvalues
and eigenvectors.
State transformation and solution of state space
equations
State transition matrix, state transition equation,
the canonical forms of state space representation,
solution for states equations represented in
canonical forms.
Stability, Controllability, Observability of control
systems
Asymptotic stability, BIBO stability, State
controllability, output controllability, state
observability.
Control systems design in state space
250

Literature
September 2012
Pole-placement design with state feedback Pole

placement and controller design with state
observer, Controller design using MATLAB,
Introduction to analogue computations.
Introduction to non-linear and optimal control
systems
Textbook:
G. Mulissa ,Introduction to control Engineering
References:
Modern Control Engineering by Katsuhiko OGATA,
Fourth Edition
John J. D Azzo and Houpis
Matrix analysis by Bellman
Gopal
251
September 2012

Course Title: Instrumentation Engineering: 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,1,2)
ECEG-4141: Microcomputers and Interfacing
ECEG-4131: Introduction to Instrumentation
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired

System
Literature
To teach electronic circuit design techniques for

electronic instrumentation,
To introduce intelligent instrumentation beginning
from modern sensors and microprocessor based
systems
Review of Basic Instrumentation, Standards and
Organizations, Sensor Technology; Telemetry
Applications, Introduction to Intelligent Instruments
Review of Basic Instrumentation
Standards and Organizations
Sensor Technology
Telemetry Applications
Introduction to Intelligent Instruments
exercises.
Textbook:
P.H. Garrett, Advanced Instrumentation and
Computer I/O Design
References:
IEEE Transactions of Instrumentation and Control
IEE Transactions Control and Instrumentation
J.P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems
252
September 2012

Course Title: Digital Control Systems: 3
Pre-requisites:
(2,1,2)
ECEG-4132: Modern Control Systems
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
To understand, model and analyze digital control

systems
Understand computer implementation using digital
control systems, components as DAC, ADC,
microcontrollers, sensors, etc.
To design digital control systems and implement for
common servo applications.
Linear discrete dynamic-system analysis, Design of
digital control using transform techniques, design of
digital control systems using state space methods, digital
control system applications and practices.
Linear discrete dynamic-system analysis
Review of Z-transform and discrete data systems,
sample and hold, discrete equivalents to
continuous transfer functions, effect of
quantization in digital data.
Design of digital control systems using transform
techniques
Control system specifications, design using
emulation, z-plane design using root locus,
frequency response methods with z-transform and
w-transform, direct design method Ragazzini,
PID controller.
Design of Digital control using state space method
Control-law design, estimator design, regulator
design, introducing reference input, controllability
and observability.
Application and practices of digital control
Digital control system hardware, software and
253

Literature
September 2012
firmware development, system integration

(simulation and implementation), Manufacturing
digital control systems, case design mini project.
exercises.
Textbook:
Jene F. Franklin and others, Digital Control of
Dynamic systems Addison-Wesley publishing
company, second Edition.
References:
Benjamin C. Kuo today Digital Control Systems
Charles L. Phillips & H. Troy Nagle, Digital Control
System Analysis and Design
254
September 2012

Module Number
14
Microcontroller
Rationale and
The module Microcontroller helps students to learn software and
objective of the
hardware design of microcontrollers. Integrated knowledge of common
module
standard microcontrollers, digital signal processors their stand alone
operating systems interfacing with sensors and other elements of industrial
automation systems are developed.
-
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocatin
10*27=270
Course Number
ECEG-4141
ECEG-5142
Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers

Interfacing Hardware to Personal Computers
Embedded and real time systems
10
Lecture
64
Tutorial
Lab/pract
32
64
Course Name
Microcomputer & Interfacing
Embedded Systems
255
Home study
110
ECTS
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Microcomputers and Interfacing Pre-requisites:
: 3 (2,1,2)
Organization
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Microcontroller
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
To familiarize the basics of microcomputers register

level organization, instruction set and peripheral
devices interfacing.
To interface hardware to the personal computers and
design microprocessors.
Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers;
8086 Microcomputer Architecture; Programming
Microcomputers; Interfacing Fundamentals; Interfacing
Hardware to Personal Computers; Designing
Microprocessors..
Fundamentals of Microprocessors and
Microcomputers
Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC);
Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI);
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter (USART); Programmable Interval
Timer (PIT)
Interfacing Hardware to Personal Computers
Designing Micro-processors.
256
September 2012
Contents
CHAPTER 1
An Introduction To Microprocessor
And Computer
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
At the end of this chapter students
2 week
are able
To get history of
Microprocessor And
Computer.
Microprocessor and
Computer.
CHAPTER 2
2.3 Bus systems
organization

are able
To explore the 8086
this would be a stepping-stone
for learning the X 86 families
of microprocessors.
3 week
CHAPTER 3
programming
3.3 Stacks
3.4 Subroutines
3.5 Input /Output
3.6 Interrupts

are able
microprocessors.
3 week
CHAPTER 4
Interfacing
Controller (PIC)
Interface (PPI)

are able
to PC.
257
4 week

Transmitter (USART)
(PIT)
Personal Computers.
CHAPTER 5

Literature
September 2012
and COM ports
At the end of this chapter students 3 week

are able
systems using the Intel family
of microprocessors
exercises.
Textbook:
References:
Douglas V Hall, Microprocessors and InterfacingProgramming and Hardware, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
NewDelhi-2002.
Ramesh S Gaonkar, Microprocessor Programming
and Interfacing using 8085, Penram Publications, 4th
Edition, 2003
A.K.Ray, K.M.Bhurchandy, Intel MicroprocessorsArchitecture, Programming and Interfacing,
McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2004
258
September 2012

Course Title: Embedded Systems: 3 (2,1,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-4141: Microcomputers & Interfacing,
ECTS Credit: 5
Module: Microcontroller
to be Acquired

Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA
The objective of this course is to impart students for a
solid understanding of
role of embedded systems
concepts, components both hardware and software of
embedded systems
design and development processes of embedded
systems
knowledge of Embedded Systems their Design and
Programming at an Introduction level. In this course the
fundamentals of embedded systems, hardware and
firmware designs will be explored. Issues such as
embedded microcontrollers, embedded programs, realtime operating systems, low power computing,
interfacing as well as optimization, will be discussed.
Introduction
Why Study Embedded System, Contrast between
embedded systems and other computer systems,
role and purpose of embedded systems
Structure of a basic computer system, CPU
families used in microcontrollers, Basic I/O
devices and technologies, Interrupts and Memories
Embedded Programs
Program translation process, representation of
programs and their execution flow, fundamentals
of assembly language and linking, mapping tasks
in compilation
Real-time Operating systems
Context switching mechanisms, scheduling
259

Literature
September 2012
policies, message passing and shared memory

communications, inter-process communication
Low-power Computing
Sources of energy consumption, instruction-level
strategies for power management, memory system
power consumption, system-level power
management
Reliable System Design
Failures in hardware, sources of errors from
software, design verification and its role, faulttolerant techniques
Design Methodologies and Tools
Design Methodology, RTOS Tools, Logic
analyzers, Compilers and Programming
environments, Software management Tools
Networked Embedded Systems
Why networked embedded systems, examples of
networked embedded systems
Interfacing and Mixed-signal systems
D/A and A/D conversions, how to partition A/D
processing in interfaces
exercises.
75%
Textbook:
Arnold S. Berger: Embedded Systems Design
References:
Stuart R. Ball: Embedded Microprocessor Systems:
Real World Design
Michael Barr: Programming Embedded Systems in C
and C ++,
Qing Li, Caroline Yao: Real-Time Concepts for
Embedded Systems
260
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
15
Control Application
The module Control Application helps students to learn the actual
application of control and instrumentation in industry. Models of
industrial system parameters to be controlled, sensing signal processing
and controlling various industrial parameters, etc. Design simple control
and automation systems for typical industrial processes.
Help students to learn and appreciate industrial environment, standards
and practices.
Process control systems and practical control strategies.
Advanced control techniques
Distributed control systems
Robotic Fundamentals; Mechanisms and Actuators, Sensors and
Detectors
- Robot Applications and Programming
- Programmable Logic Controllers and Applications
-
Total ECTS of the

10
module
Time allocation
Lecture
10*27=270
80
Course Number
ECEG-5151
ECEG-5152
Tutorial
Lab/pract
Home study
48
32
110
Course Name
Introduction to robotics and industrial Automation
261
ECTS
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Process Control Fundamentals:
Pre-requisites:
3 (2,3,0)
ECEG-4131: Introduction to Instrumentation
(Co-requisite)
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Module: Control Application
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired

Literature
To understand the concepts of advanced industrial

process control
To design and simulate typical industrial process
control systems
A Review of Fundamental Process Control; Cascade
Control; Ratio Control; Dead Time Control; Feedforward
Control; Nonlinear Compensation and Adaptive Control;
Multivariable Control; Fuzzy Logic and Process Control
Tuning; Distributed Control Systems.
Review of Fundamentals of Process Control
On-Off, Proportional, Integral, and Derivative
Practical Control Strategies
Cascade Control, Ratio Control, Dead Time
Control, Feedforward Control
Advanced Control Techniques
Nonlinear and Adaptive Control, Multivariable
Control, and Fuzzy Logic Control
Distributed Control Systems
75% lecture, 100% lab.
Textbook:
Seborg, D., Edgar F., Mellichamp D., Process
Dynamics and Control, Wiley, Newyork 1989.
References:
-
262
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Robotics and
Pre-requisites:
Industrial Automation: 3 (3,0,2)
ECEG 3111: Introduction to Control
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester X
Module: Control Application
Module Coordinator TBA
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Understand the elements of an industrial robot,

mechanisms, sensors, actuators and end effectors.
Program robotic manipulators
Acquaintance with artificial intelligence applications
in robotics
Introduce industrial control circuits and applications
of PLCs in modern industrial control
Robot Fundamentals; Mechanisms and Actuators,
Sensors and Detectors; Modeling and Control of
Manipulators; Robot Applications and Programming;
Review of Industrial Control Devices and Circuits; Basic
Ladder Logic and Control; Programmable Logic
Controllers and Applications.
Robotic Fundamentals
Introduction, Robot kinematics; rigid body motion;
transformation of coordinates
Mechanisms and Actuators
Sensors and Detectors
Position, Velocity, Acceleration, Force torque;
Touch and Tactile Sensors; Proximity and Range
Detectors, Machine Vision
Modeling and Control of Manipulators
Newtons equations; Euler Lagrange method;
motion control; manipulator control; trajectory
generation; computer control
Robot Applications and Programming
Pick and place; spot and arc welding; surface
coating; assembly
Review of Industrial Control Devices and
Electronics
263

Literature
September 2012
Basic Ladder Logic and Control

Programmable Logic Controllers and Applications
exercises.
75% lecture, 100% lab.
Textbook:
M. W. Spong and M. Vidyasagar., Wiley, New York,
1989: Robot Dynamics and Control
References:
P.J. McKerrow, Addison-Wesley, 1991: Introduction
to Robotics.
Sciavicco, L., and Siciliano, B., Springer-Verlag
Advanced Textbooks in Control and Signal
Processing Series, London, UK, 2000: Modeling and
Control of Robot Manipulators, 2nd Ed.
Canudas de Wit, Siciliano and Bastin, SpringerVerlag London Limited, 1996: Theory of Robot
Control.
Asada, H. and Slotine, J.-J. E., J. Wiley and Sons,
1986: Robot Analysis and Control.
Murray, R., Li, Z. and Sastry, S. CRC Press, 1994: A
mathematical introduction to robotic manipulation.
Robin R. Murphy: Introduction to AI Robotics.
264
September 2012
Microelectronics Focus Modules and Courses

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
12
Electronic Circuits and Design
Module Electronic Circuits and Design enables MSc graduates with
competence on the field of modern integrated circuits. The module conveys
knowledge in functionality of integrated circuit devices and entire field of
IC Design.
The graduates will be able to develop and design circuits of small and
intermediate complexity for semicustom and full-custom applications using
latest Computer aided Design (CAD)-tools for layout, description,
simulation, and test of integrated circuits.
Understand basic functions and concepts of microelectronic devices
and circuits;
- Learn the function of microelectronic systems,
- Adopt knowledge in variety of applications.
- Get familiar and apply VLSI concepts, namely the design,
simulation and test of integrated circuits.
- Learn and apply a hardware description language.
- Be able to use mathematical methods in system description and
analysis
- Apply circuit analysis models for analog and mixed-mode
simulation
- Perform circuit analysis of CMOS digital circuits, including logic
components and their interconnects.
- Get familiar with CAD tools and use them in project work to
Realize small sized integrated circuits.
- Design of digital integrated circuit with medium complexity using
appropriate synthesis tools and implementation of them on FPGA
technology.
- Understand market requirements and impact on design cycles.
15
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
Lecture
Tutorial
Lab/pract
265
Home study

15*27=405
Course Number
ECEG-4121
ECEG-4123
ECEG- 5122
112
48
80
Course Name
VLSI Design
September 2012
165
ECTS
5
5
5

Course Title: Microelectronic Devices and
Pre-requisites:
Circuits: 3 (2,3,0)
Technology
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Electronics Circuits and Design
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents

Understand the basic concepts realization of
microelectronic devices and circuits;
Study cases of microelectronic systems;
Be able to effectively participate in microelectronic
applications, selection, modification, purchase and
production to meet the market / social demands
Course Description:
Modeling of microelectronic devices, basic
microelectronic circuit analysis and design, physical
electronics of semiconductor junction and MOS
devices, relation of electrical behavior to internal
physical processes, development of circuit models,
understanding and limitations of various models
Course Outline:
Boltzmann diode model
Design of rectifier circuit and computer aided
analysis
NMOS and PMOS transistor operating principle,
modeling MOS transistor, design of CMOS inverter
and simulation
BJT models,
266

Literature
September 2012
Advantages and limitations of the simulation models

(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Computer Simulation of electronic circuits, by
R. Raghuram;
Microcomputer - Aided Analysis of Electronic
Circuits by M.Bialko
Data sheets and SPICE models of Texas
Instruments
Microelectronics: Digital and Analog Circuits
and Systems J. Millman McGraw Hill,1979
267
September 2012

Course Title: VLSI Design : 3 (3,0,2)
Pre-requisites:
ECEG-3102:Computer Architecture and
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: Electronics Circuits and Designs
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Course Objective:
To acquaint the student with VLSI concepts
To enable the student design , simulate and test ASICs
To acquaint the student with hardware description
language
Be able to use mathematical methods and circuit
analysis models in analysis of CMOS digital
electronics circuits, including logic components and
their interconnect.
Be able to create models of moderately sized CMOS
circuits that realize specified digital functions.
Be able to use hardware design languages such as
VHDL.
Be able to complete a significant VLSI design project
having a set of objective criteria and design constraints
Course Description:
Introduction to VLSI. Programmable ASICs. Hardware
Description Languages. Simulation. Logic Synthesis.
Tests. ASIC Construction
Course Outline:
Introduction to VLSI: Digital systems and VLSI; Gate
Arrays; Standard Cells; Functional Blocks; CMOS
Logic
Programmable ASICs: ASIC Library Design ;
Programmable ASIC Logic Cells; Programmable
ASIC I/O Cells; Programmable ASIC Interconnect;
Programmable ASIC Design Software
Hardware Description Languages: VHDL; Verilog
HDL; C Based Languages
Simulation: Logic Simulation and Modeling; Fault
268

System
Literature
September 2012
Simulation
Logic Synthesis: Timing Simulation and Verification;
Placement and Routing; Layout Extraction
Tests: Design for Testability; Test Program
Development; Prototype Evaluation
ASIC Construction: Floor planning And Placement;
Interconnects and Routing
exercises
(40%)
Textbook:
References:
Digital Integrated Circuits, Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha
Chandrakasan and Borivoje Nikolic
Application-Specific Integrated Circuits, 1997, M.
John, S. Smith Modern
VLSI Design System-on-Chip Design, Prentice
Hall, 2002, Wayne Wolf
Principles of CMOS VLSI Design Neil H. E. Weste,
et al.
HDL Chip Design, Donne Publishing, 1996, J. Smith
269
September 2012

Course Title: CAD of Electronic Circuits :
Pre-requisites: ECE-4121: Microelectronic
3(2,0,3)
Devices and Circuits
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Module: Electronics Circuits and Design
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents

Course Objective:
To develop hands on experience on ECAD tools
To appreciate time to market problem and ECAD front
end design tools
. Course Description:
Electronic Computer Aided Design, analog simulation,
continuous transient response; digital simulation, timing
diagrams, laboratory exercises using PSPICE and
Modelsim digital simulator; introduction to back end
tools for floor planning and routing
Course Outline:
Introduction to ECAD (Electronic Computer Aided
Design)
Introduction to Simulation algorithms for modeling for
transient response. Approximate Modeling of digital
circuits with delay
PSPICE: -Introduction to PSPICE; design of simple
analog circuits using spice: RC coupled amplifier,
DC operating point, transient analysis, plotting
frequency response, design of a differential
amplifier suing operational amplifier, simulation and
testing;
VHDL: - Digital circuits described in hardware
description programming language, VHDL and
Verilog languages; design of simple combinational
circuits in VHDL, four input AND gate, simulation;
design of a MUX, simulation, timing diagram;
Introduction to back end ECAD tools
exercises
270

Literature
September 2012

Textbook:
References:
A VHDL Primer by J. Bhaskar; Pub: Pearson
Education Asia;
Xilinx ISE 6 Software Manuals
Quartus II Web Edition- help menu
Electronic workbench literature and help menu on
271
September 2012

Module Number
13
Instrumentation and Interfacing
Rationale and
Module Instrumentation and Interfacing enables students to build the
objective of the
knowledge on various types of Instruments in terms of their
module
operations/application, also enables to learn programming of
microcomputer and its Interfacing techniques.
BSc students can build profound knowledge on the basic operational
principles and limitations of electrical and electronic instruments. To
analyze and compare commercial instruments and design similar systems
under given constraints.
Similarly this module enables to build knowledge on microcomputer CPU
like 8086 in terms of its architecture, programming model, memory
mapping, interfacing Peripherals, PIC, etc.
The module also introduces students to random process in general and noise
in particular and enable students to analyze the performance of receivers in
the presence of noise, enable the student to design optimum receivers and
introduce them to the theory of information and coding
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocated
15*27=405
Course Number
ECEG-4131
ECEG-4132
ECEG-4133
following:
- Characteristics on Instrumentation
- Communication System
- Characteristics on Microcomputer
15
Lecture
96
Tutorial
Lab/prac
64
64
Course Name
272
Home study
181
ECTS
5
5
5
September 2012

Course Title: Introduction to Instrumentation : Pre-requisites:
3 (2,1,2)
Engineering
Systems
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired

To analyze and compare commercial instruments and
General Principles
Characteristics Static and Dynamic; Noise and
Interference in Instrumentations
Passive Sensors: Resistive, Capacitive, Inductive;
Active Sensors and Applications; Discrete Output
Output Presentation
Semiconductor
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
273
September 2012

1.1 Definitions
1.4 Types of Error
1.7 Limiting Errors

Errors
CHAPTER 2
Instruments
Galvanometer
mechanism (PMMC)
2.5 DC Ammeters
2.6 DC Voltmeters
CHAPTER 3
Instruments
3.1 Introduction
Measurements
3.8 Watt-hour meter
To
understand
application
of
Instruments.
principles
and 4 weeks
DC
indicating
4 weeks
application
of
AC
indicating
Instruments such as
Electrodynamometer
Thermo-instruments
274

CHAPTER 4
Transducers
4.3 Strain Gages
CHAPTER 5
systems
5.5 Multiplexing
CHAPTER 6
Oscilloscopes
6.1 Introduction
6.5 Delay line
Literature
September 2012
3 weeks

applications of
2 weeks
tape recorders.
working.
1 week
of CRO and CRT.

exercises.
Textbook:
References:
275
September 2012

Feedback

Course Title: Communication Systems 3(2 3
Pre-requisites:
0)
Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VI
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired

To understand the principles/concepts of the noise
and the theory of information and coding.
To apply the knowledge of random process in
general and noise in particular in the context of
Communication Systems.
To have sound understanding of the analysis of
the performance of receivers in the presence of
noise.
On completion of the course students are expected :
To develop alternative approaches to
modify/redesign of sub-system of Communication
System.
To enable the student to design optimum
receivers.
Course Description/Course Contents Noise in receiver
Review of Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes
Mathematical Representation of Noise
Noise in Amplitude Modulation Systems
Noise in Frequency Modulation Systems.
Thresholds in Frequency Modulation Systems
Noise in PCM and DM
Pulse / Digital-Modulation Systems
Receiver
Optimum Receivers design
Channel Equalization
276
September 2012
Optimum Filter Design

Information Theory/Coding
Introduction to Information Theory
Entropy, Mutual Information
Source Coding
Introduction to channel coding
Course Outline
.
Contents
CHAPTER-1
Spectral Analysis
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Fourier Series
Examples of Fourier
Series
1.3 Sampling Function
1.4 Linear System Response
1.5 Normalized Power
1.6 Power Spectral Density
1.7 Fourier Transform
1.8 Convolution
1.9 Correlation
Cross Correlation
Auto Correlation
CHAPTER- 2
Random Variables and Process
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Probability
2.3 Random Process
2.4 PSD of Random Sequences
CHAPTER-3
Mathematical Representation of
Noise
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Sources of Noise
3.3 Types of Noise
White Noise
Colored Noise
Chapter Objectives
Time Allotted
2 Weeks
To review the basics of Fourier

series and Fourier Transform.
Analyze the power Spectral density,
Cross Correlation, and Auto
Correlation properties.
1 Week
To Review the properties of random
variables and random processes.
2 Weeks
To represent different kinds/Types
of noise mathematically.
277

CHAPTER-4
Noise in Amplitude Modulation
Systems
4.1 Introduction
receivers
4.3 Advantage of SuperHeterodyne Principle
4.4 Single-Sideband Suppressed
Carrier
Signal Power
Noise Power
4.5 Double Sideband Suppressed
Carrier
Signal Power
Noise Power
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
September 2012
3 weeks
Analyze the effect of noise in

Amplitude modulation.
Calculate the signal power and noise
power in both SSB-SC and DSB-SC
and also find the SNR.
4.6 Double Sideband With Carrier

4.7 Square-Law Demodulation
4.8 Envelop Demodulation
CHAPTER-4
Noise in Frequency Modulation
4.1 Introduction
4.2 FM Demodulator
3 Weeks
Analyze mathematically the effects
of noise in Frequency modulation.
Calculate the SNR in an FM signal.
CHAPTER -5
Noise in Pulse Code Modulation
and Delta Modulation
5.1 Introduction
5.2 PCM Transmission
CHAPTER-6
Optimum Receivers
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Optimum Receiver Design
6.3 Channel Equalization
6.4 Optimum Filter Design
CHAPTER-7
Fundamentals in Information
2 Weeks
2 Weeks
Design Optimum Receivers and
Optimum Filters for Communication
Receivers.
To introduce entropy as a basic

measure of Information
278
2 Weeks

Theory
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Uncertainty, Information, and
Entropy
7.3 Source Coding Theorem
7.4 Data Compaction
7.5 Mutual Information
7.6 Channel capacity
7.7 Channel Coding Theorem
Literature
September 2012
State Mutual Information and its

relation to the capacity of Channel.
Apply Different Channel and Source
Coding Theorems

(40%)
Textbook:
Communication Systems, 2nd and 3rd edition
Digital and Analog Communication Systems
(6th Edition) by Leon W. Couch
Modern Digital and Analog Communications
Systems(The Oxford Series in Electrical and
Computer Engineering) by B.P. Lathi
References:
Simon Haykin: Communication System, 4th
Edition.
John G Proakis: Digital CommunicationFull
bibliographic citation; sources not older than 5
years (older only in very exceptional cases)
Journals & Magazines: Internet browsing
279
September 2012

Course Title: Microcomputer and Interfacing: Pre-requisites:
3(2,1,2)
Organization
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
This course is designed to impart in-depth knowledge in

the design, programming and organization of
and Signals). This course completely covers the popular
Intel P 8086, which would be a stepping-stone for
learning the X 86 families of microprocessors.
At the end of the course the students would be capable of:
microprocessors.
peripherals to PC.
Developing Interfacing Applications using Centronic
and COM ports
Course Description/Course Contents Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers
Register level organization; Memory organization; Bus
systems; Peripheral hardware organization
8086
Instruction
Set;
Assembly
language
280
September 2012
Programmable
Interrupt
Controller
(PIC);
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
An Introduction To Microprocessor
And Computer
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
2 week
will be able to
To get history of
Microprocessor And
Computer.
Microprocessor and
Computer.
CHAPTER 2
2.3 Bus systems
organization

will be able to
To explore the 8086
this would be a stepping-stone
for learning the X 86 families
of microprocessors.
3 week
CHAPTER 3

will be able to
3 week
281

3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
programming
Stacks
Subroutines
Input /Output
Interrupts
September 2012

microprocessors.
CHAPTER 4
Interfacing
Controller (PIC)
Interface (PPI)
Transmitter (USART)
(PIT)
Personal Computers.

will be able to
to PC.
and COM ports
CHAPTER 5
At the end of this chapter students 3 week

will be able to
systems using the Intel family
of microprocessors

4 week

(40%)
attendance
282

Literature
September 2012
Textbook:
References:
Douglas V Hall, Microprocessors and
Interfacing-Programming and Hardware,
2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, NewDelhi-2002.
Ramesh S Gaonkar, Microprocessor
Programming and Interfacing using 8085,
Penram Publications, 4th Edition, 2003
A.K.Ray, K.M.Bhurchandy, Intel
Microprocessors-Architecture, Programming
and Interfacing, McGraw-Hill International
Edition, 2004
283
September 2012

Wolaita Soddo University
Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
14
EM Waves and Microwave Devices
Module EM Waves and Microwave Devices helps B.Sc. students to
build the knowledge on the working principles/concepts/technologies of
EM Waves and Guide Structures and EM Waves and Guide Structures.
BSc graduates can build profound knowledge of quantification of the
effects of accelerated charges in producing time-varying electromagnetic
waves, Maxwells equations, the governing equations for EM wave
propagation. It enables to gain the knowledge and understanding of the
working principles of different types of waveguides, the basic microwave
devices and systems. It helps to appreciate the use of microwave devices
and systems that they come across in their carriers.
Optoelectronics and Wireless Communication deals with the basic
principles and applications of common optoelectronic and wireless
components that are explained to enable the students to apply these
devices in electronic systems.
following:
EM Waves and Guide Structures provide knowledge on antennas and
radio wave propagation, Maxwell's Equations, Gradient of a Scalar
field, Divergence & Curl of a Vector Field, the Divergence & Stokes's
Theorems, Boundary Conditions; Time-Harmonic Fields. Wave
Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics; Plane Waves in Free Space; Plane
Waves in Lossless Dielectrics; Plane Waves in Good Conductors;
Power and Poynting Vector, Poynting Theorem; Refection of Plane
Wave at Normal and Oblique Incidence;This course also introduce the
concept of transmission Line Equations; Input Impedance, SWR, and
Power; The Smith Chart; Some Application of Transmission Lines,
Waveguides - Modes; Power Transmission and Attenuation;
Waveguide Resonators. Radiation Integrals and Auxiliary Potential
Functions.
Microwave Devices and Systems: During the courses of this module
284
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
19*27=513
Course Number
ECEG-4141
ECEG-5142
ECEG-5143
ECEG-5144
September 2012
the graduate students will learn different types of waveguides, mostly

passive and partly active microwave devices & systems and their
application in communication systems. The course focuses on
concepts, theories and applications of microwave devices and
systems.
Optoelectronics & Wireless and Mobile Communication
- Repeat physical principles in optics and properties of light and
electromagnetic waves
- Learn properties of optical fibres (e.g. modes, perture, bandwidth)
- Learn properties of light sources and receiver (Laser, photodiodes,transistor, CCD)
- Exercise I applications of optoelectronics ( fiber-interferometry,
fiber-amplification, data transmission)
- Gain knowledge and understanding of the working principles of
different types of Wireless Mobile communication systems.
- Understand and apply frequency reuse and efficient spectral use
- Understand the concept of modern switching used in Mobile
communication.
Upon successful passing the module the student will be able to identify
and understand the application, operation and maintenance of digital
switching systems
The course also comprises of a term paper
19
Lecture
128
Tutorial
Lab/prac
192
0
Course Name
Optoelectronics
Wireless and Mobile Communication
285
Home study
193
ECTS
5
5
4
5
September 2012

Course Title: EM Waves & Guide Structures: Pre-requisites:
3 (2,3,0)
System
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: VII
Module: EM Waves and Microwave Devices Module Coordinator: TBA
Lecturer: TBA
Understand and quantify the effects of accelerated
charges in producing time-varying electromagnetic
waves.
Be able to derive- from Maxwells equations- the
governing equations for EM wave propagation, RF
transmission lines, rectangular waveguides and resonant
cavities.
Have gained insight into the applications of RF
transmission lines, the use of Smith Chart and matching
techniques.
Course Description/Course Contents Review of Vectors and Maxwell's Equations.
Integrals; Gradient of a Scalar field, Divergence & Curl
of a Vector Field, the Divergence & Stokes's Theorems,
Laplacian of a Scalar Field; Solenoidal & Irrotational
Vector Fields, Helmholz's Theorem; Field Quantities;
Maxwell's Equations; Boundary Conditions; TimeHarmonic Fields.
Waves in General; Wave Propagation in Lossy
Dielectrics; Plane Waves in Free Space; Plane Waves in
Lossless Dielectrics; Plane Waves in Good Conductors;
Power and Poynting Vector, Poynting Theorem;
Refection of Plane Wave at Normal and Oblique
Incidence; Summary of TEM Waves.
Transmission Lines
Electrical Dimension, Circuit and Field Analysis;
Transmission Line Equations; Input Impedance, SWR,
to be Acquired
286
September 2012
and Power; The Smith Chart; Some Application of

Transmission Lines.
Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides; TM Modes; TE
Modes; Power Transmission and Attenuation;
Waveguide Resonators.
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Review of Vectors and Maxwell's
Equations 1.1 Scalar & Vector Fields
1. Line, Surface, & Volume Integrals
1.3 Gradient of a Scalar field
1.4 Divergence & Curl of a Vector Field
1.5 The Divergence & Stokes's Theorems
1.6 Laplacian of a Scalar Field
1.7 Solenoidal & Irrotational Vector Fields
1.8 Helmholz's Theorem
1.9 Field Quantities
1.10 Maxwell's Equations
1.11 Boundary Conditions
CHAPTER 2
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Waves in General
2.3 Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics
2.4 Plane waves in Lossless Dielectrics
2.5 Plane waves in Free Space
2.6 Plane waves in Good Conductors
2.7Power and the Poynting Vectors
2.8 Reflection of a plane wave at Normal
Incidence
2.9 Reflection of a plane wave at Oblique
Incidence
CHAPTER 3
Transmission Lines
3.1 Introduction
Chapter Objective
Time Allotted
2 weeks
To
Differentiate,
and
Mathematically manipulate about
Vectors and Maxwells equation.
To characterize the wave in 4 weeks

general, its propagation in Lossy
and Lossless Dielectrics.
To know about plane waves in
Free Space and Good Conductors;
power and pointing vectors as
well as reflection of plane wave at
normal & oblique incidence.
To enable students to determine 4 weeks

the transmission line parameters
using transmission line equations
287
September 2012
3.2 Transmission Line Parameters

3.3 Transmission Line Equations
3.4 Input Impedance .SWR ,and Power
3.5 The Smith Chart
3.6 Some Application of Transmission
Lines.
CHAPTER 4
Waveguides
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Rectangular Waveguides
4.3Transeverse Magnetic (TM) Modes
4.4 Transverse Electric (TE ) Modes
4.5 Wave Propagation in the Guide
4.6 Power Transmission and Attenuation
4.7 Wave Guide Current and Mode
Excitation
4.8 Waveguide Resonators.
4.9 Dielectric Slab Waveguides
and the Smith Chart.

Lectures, tutorials, assignments, and project, etc

(40%)
Textbook:
New York, 2001
Literature

Rectangular Waveguides, TM
Modes, TE Modes, Power
Transmission and Attenuation
and Waveguide Resonators.
5 weeks
References:
Hayt, W.H., Engineering Electromagnetics, 4th
ed., McGraw-Hill, 1981.
1999
288
September 2012

Course Title: Microwave Devices and
Pre-requisites:
Systems 3(2 3 0)
ECEG-4141: EM Waves and Guide Structures
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Module: EM Waves and Microwave Devices
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired
Course Objective and Competences to be Acquired:

Appreciate the use of microwave devices and systems
that they come across in their carriers and daily life.
principles of different types of waveguides
Understand and use the basic microwave devices and
systems (both classical and modern)
Appreciate the use of microwave devices
and
systems that they come across in their
carriers and
daily life
Course Description/Course Contents The course mainly deals with different types of
waveguides, mostly passive and partly active microwave
devices & systems and their application in
communication systems. The course focuses on concepts,
theories and applications of microwave devices and
systems. The course also comprises of a term paper
The course consists of:
Principles and Analysis of Waveguides
Introduction to Microwave Circuits
Review of Network Parameters and Transmission Line
Theory
The Scattering Parameters
Impedance Matching
Passive Microwave Components and Networks
Introduction to Active Microwave Devices
Course Outline
Contents
CHAPTER-1
RF/Microwave Systems
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Revision of Maxwells
Chapter Objectives
Revise some important topics such
as Maxwells Equations and basic
waveguide analysis.
289
Time Allotted
2 Weeks

Equation
1.3 RF, M-Wave, and millimeter
wave applications
1.4 Freq bands and modes of
operation
1.5 Review of Waveguide analysis
1.6 Elementary Definitions
1.7 Basic RF transmitters and
Receivers
CHAPTER-2
Lumped and Distributed Systems
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Transition form RF to
Microwave Circuits
2.3 Parasitic Effects on Lumped
Elements
2.4 Distributed Elements
2.5 Hybrid Element
Helical Coil
CHAPTER-3
Active Devices
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Diodes
3.3 Microwave Transistors
Transistor classification
Transistor structure
DC model of BJT
3.4 Hetrojunction Bipolar
transistors
3.5 Microwave FET
MOSFETS
GaAs MESFETS
HEMT
CHAPTER-4
Two-port Networks
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Two Port Parameters
4.3 S Parameters
September 2012
Describe some areas of Microwave

and Millimeter Wave Applications.
3 Weeks
Distinguish between lumped and
Distributed elements based on the
physical length of the lumped
components.
Investigate the parasitic effects on
Lumped Elements.
2 Weeks
Introduces some of the Active
Microwave devices such as Diodes,
BJT Transistors, and Field Effect
Transistors.
3 Weeks
Describe some of the tools needed
for RF/Microwave Design such as
Scattering Parameters.
290

4.4 Stability
4.5 Gain
Power Gain
Voltage Gain
Current Gain
4.6 Introduction to Three-Ports
CHAPTER-5
Impedance Matching
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Smith Charts and Matching
5.3 Impedance Matching Networks
5.4 Element Matching
Single Element
Two Element
5.5Matching Networks
Using Lumped Elements
Using Distributed Elements
5.6 Bandwidth Constraints
CHAPTER-6
Microwave Filters
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Low Pass Prototype Filter
Design
Butterworth Response
Chebyshev Response
6.3 LP, HP, and BP Filters
6.4 Transmission Line Filters
Literature
September 2012
Analyze the Stability and gain of

two-port systems using SParameters.
3 Weeks
Design Impedance Matching
Networks using Smith Chart.
Design Matching Networks using
Lumped and Distributed Element
method.
2 Weeks
Describe a simple practical design
process which will solve basic filter
needs.

(Reading+ mini project).
(40%)
Textbook:
Woldegiorgis Woldemariam (Prof.), Applied
Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, Addis
Ababa University, 1991
References:
291
September 2012

Electromagnetics, Oxford University Press, New
York, 2001.
Hayt, W.H., Engineering Electromagnetics, 4th
ed., McGraw-Hill, 1981.
1999.
S.J Orfanidis, Electromagnetic waves and
Antennas
C. A Balanis, Antenna Theory, Analysis and
Design.

Course Title: Optoelectronics : 3 (2,3,0)

ECTS Credit: 4
Pre-requisites:
Technology
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Course Objective:
To understand the essential requirements for laser
action in a material and be able to describe different
types of laser.
To be able to describe an optical modulator.
To be able to describe light detectors such as the
photodiode, avalanche photodiode and photomultiplier
and be aware of their relative merits.
To be able to describe optical fibers and to discuss
which are the important parameters of these in an
optical communications system.
Course Description/Course Contents Course Description:
Introduction to the physical principles upon which the
laser and a number of other optoelectronic devices are
based. Different types of laser, second harmonic
generation using lasers, modulators (both electro-opto
292

Literature
September 2012
and acousto-optic) and detectors such as the photodiode,

avalanche photodiode and photomultiplier. Properties of
optical fibers and the likely requirements of an optical
communication system.
Course Outline:
Lasers: Spontaneous and stimulated emission, Einstein
A and B coefficients; optical cavities
Fabry Perot; inversion mechanisms
Examples of different types of laser; gas lasers, solid
state optically pumped lasers, dye lasers,
homo junction and hetero junction semiconductor diode
lasers
Q switching; second harmonic generation; Optical
modulators, electro-optic modulators, acousto-optic
modulators
Light detectors, semiconductor diode detectors,
Avalanche Photodiodes; Optical Fibers
Optical communications
Laboratory demonstration using fiber optics experimental
kits; laser safety, characteristics of a diode laser
Textbook:
References:
Optoelectronics, an Introduction, Prentice-Hall by J.
Wilson, J.F.B. Hawkes
Diode Lasers and Photonic Integrated Circuits by
Coldren and Corzine. Physics of Optoelectronic
Devices by Chuang, S. L.
293
September 2012

Course Title: Wireless and Mobile
Pre-requisites: ECEG-4132: Communication
Systems
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: x
Lecturer: TBA
Course Objectives &
Contents

principles of different types of Wireless Mobile
Understand and application frequency reuse and efficient
spectral use.
Mobile communication.
The course will provide a good understanding of
fundamental problems and counter-measure techniques in
digital communications over wireless mobile channels.
Gain insight into principles of various digital switching,
like packet switching and introduction to advances in
switching.
To be able to identify and understand the application,
operation and maintenance of these digital switching.
Overview of Wireless and Mobile Communications.
Wireless Communication Channels: Channel Models and
Propagation.
Time Domain Equalization (Viterbi Algorithm and
Decision Feedback Equalization) and Spatial Domain
Processing (Smart Antennas).
TDMA Cellular Systems and Engineering: Frequency
Reuse, Sectorization, Splitting and Blocking Probability.
TDMA Cellular Systems Engineering II: Channel
Assignment Techniques, Dynamic Channel Allocation,
and Handoffs.
Spread Spectrum Technology [CDMA, FHSS, and RAKE
reception].
CDMA Cellular Architectures: system architecture, power
294
September 2012
control, and system capacity.

CDMA Cellular Architectures II: Mobility management,
soft handoffs, interference cancellation.
The GSM 2G system and its evolution to 2.5G: GSM
system operation.
S-95: CDMA based 2G system, system architecture and
performance.
3G/4G Systems Architecture and Technology; Mobile
IP/TCP, user and foreign agents; course review
Course Outline
Contents
Chapter Objective
CHAPTER ONE :
Introduction to mobile and wireless
communication
1.1.Overview of wireless and mobile
communications
1.2.Wireless network applications:
wireless market
1.3.Future wireless networks
1.4.Wireless communication channels
1.5.Channel models and propagation
1.6.Channel equalization
1.7. Introduction to Channel assignment
CHAPTER TWO:
2.1. Introduction to digital communication
System Performance
2.2. Digital modulation
2.3. Error control
CHAPTER THEREE
Time Domain Equalization
3.1. Introduction
3.2. Viterbi Algorithm
3.2.1. Decision Feedback Equalization
3.3. Spatial Domain Processing (Smart
Time
Allotted
1 week
Introduce the applications of

Wireless and Mobile
Communications
Define channel types and
models.
Apply channel equalization.
At the end of this chapter, 1 week

understand what digital
modulation
and
error
control is.
At the end of this chapter,

understand what time
domain equalization is.
Spatial Domain Processing
(Smart Antennas).
295
2 weeks
September 2012
Antennas).
CHAPTER FOUR
Cellular systems engineering
3weeks
4.1. Introduction
4.2. TDMA Cellular Systems and Engineering
4.2.1. Frequency Reuse,
4.2.2. Sectorization, Splitting
4.2.3. Blocking Probability
4.3. TDMA Cellular Systems and Engineering II
4.3.1. Channel Assignment Techniques,
4.3.2. Dynamic Channel Allocation
4.3.3. Handoffs.
CHAPTER FIVE
Spread Spectrum
Determine TDMA
architecture, channel
assignment, sectorization
and frequency re-use,
blocking probability, and
Hand offs, and Cell
splitting
2 weeks
Explain the basic concept
behind spread spectrum
transmission.
5.1.Introduction to spreading spectrum

5.2.Fading of wireless communications
5.3.Spread Spectrum Technology
5.3.1. Direct sequence spreading spectrum
systems
5.3.2. FHSS
5.3.3. CDMA
5.3.4. RAKE reception and RAKE receivers
5.3.5. Direct sequence spreading spectrum
systems
Identify the types of Spread

Spectrum transmission.
Reconstruct and Explain the
architecture of Rake
Receivers.
CHAPTER SIX
CDMA Cellular Architectures
6.1.Introduction to CDMA
6.1.1. CDMA system architecture
6.1.2. CDMA System Capacity
6.1.3. CDMA Channel Concept
6.2.CDMA Cellular Architectures II
6.2.1. Mobility management, ,
6.2.2. soft handoffs
6.2.3. Interference cancellation.
CHAPTER SEVEN
The generation of cellular systems
3 weeks
Clearly
explain
the
architecture of a CDMA
transceiver, its power control.
Application
of
transmission or
communication.
296
CDMA
Wireless

understand what stages
September 2012
does the cellular system go

6.1 Introduction to the generation of cellular
through to reach this stage.
systems
First, second, third, forth,
6.2.The GSM 2G system and its evolution to
and next generation cellular
2.5G:
systems
6.2.1. GSM system Architecture.
Mobile TCP/IP operation
6.2.2. GSM system operation
6.3.S-95
6.3.1. CDMA based 2G system
6.3.2. System architecture and
performance.
6.4.3G/4G Systems Architecture and
Technology;
6.4.1. Mobile IP/TCP
6.4.2. user and foreign agents;
6.5.course review
(40%)
Literature
Textbook:
----References:
Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures,
Yi-Bing Lin and Imrich Chlamtac, Wiley
2001.
The Mobile Communications Handbook
SECOND EDITION, Jerry Gibson [editor],
CRC Press 1999.
Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications
systems and networks
297
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
Total ECTS of the

module
Time allocation
10*27=270
Course Number
ECEG-5151
ECEG-5152
15
IC and PCB Technology
Module IC and PCP Technology deals with todays Integrated Circuits
technologies that are widely used in all fields of electronic systems,
depending on power specification, data range, and speed various
technologies are to be applied. For design and specification of electronic
systems engineers need basic knowledge in technologies for
manufacturing, packaging, and mounting of integrated circuits.
- Learn the basic manufacturing processes for integrated circuits
- Learn principles of planar technology on silicon material
- Understand CMOS and bipolar device concepts
- Be able to select appropriate technology for aimed applications
- Learn to specify the requirements for an appropriate package
- Understand electrical, thermal, mechanical reliability
- Learn the basic processes for printed circuit board (PCB)
- Make designs for small scale PCB solutions
- Understand of completed systems on board.
Realize a project by manufacturing a functional system on a PCB.
10
Lecture
64
Tutorial
Lab/prac
64
32
Course Name
298
Home study
110
ECTS
5
5
September 2012

Course Title Integrated Circuit Technology : 3 Pre-requisites:
(2,3,0)
ECEG-4121: Microelectronic Devices and
Circuits
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: IX
Module: IC and PCB Technology
Lecturer: TBA
to be Acquired

Literature
Course Objective:
To understand the basic concepts planar IC
manufacturing process,
Analog ICs, digital ICs and BiCMOS processes
Getting introduced to Silicon, GaAs and SiGe IC
technologies
Course Description:
Introduction to integrated circuits; Low frequency analog
integrated circuits, operational amplifier, IC fabrication
process for linear ICs; CMOS advantage for VLSI digital
circuits; low power, very large number of transistors in a
single IC -millions, CMOS manufacturing process;
Hardware Description languages for VLSI design;
introduction to SiGe BiCMOS devices, GaAs microwave
ICs.; MMIC; MEMS,
Course Outline:
Historical overview of IC manufacturing
NMOS, PMOS and CMOS comparison
Bipolar transistor linear IC process, Operational
amplifiers
Photolithography, planar construction, SSI, LSI and
VLSI
Hardware description languages for VLSI / ULSI
digital circuit design
exercises
Textbook:
299
September 2012
References:
Basic VLSI design: systems and circuits, PrenticeHall, by Douglas A. Pucknell
Principles of CMOS VLSI design by Neil H. E.
Weste, Kamran Eshraghian Publisher: Addison
Wesley
Handbook of VLSI Microlithography edited by John
N. Helbert, Motorola
Course Title: PCB Technology and
Pre-requisites:
Application: 3(2,1,2)
ECE-5151: Integrated Circuit Technology,
ECE-5122: CAD of Electronic Circuits
ECTS Credit: 5
Semester: X
Module: IC and PCB Technology
Lecturer: TBA

to be Acquired
Course Objective:
To develop theoretical and practical knowledge of
modern multilayer circuit design technology
Course Description:
Introduction to printed circuit boards; single layer and
multi layer boards, color code in multilayer PCBs,
selection of insulating board material, FR4, plated
through holes, photolithography process for PCB
manufacturing; positive and negative photo resist,
preparation of artwork using PCB software, auto
placement and auto routing software packages, exposure
in ultraviolet, developing photoresist, etching in ferric
chloride solution, high speed carbide drills, CNC drilling
machine, hand soldering, surface mounted devices; wave
soldering and reflow soldering for mass production;
prototyping of PCB, use of toner transfer method for
simple PCBs; software automatic conversion of
PSPICE circuits into artwork; computer generation of
code for CNC drilling machine.
300

Literature
September 2012
Course Outline:
Introduction, Breadboard design, PCB prototyping
Selection of PCB board material digital, microwave
applications
PCB artwork software
Single layer PCB; Multi layer PCBs; Digital
multilayer boards, LTCC process for GH applications
Photolithography process
Mass production techniques wave soldering and re
flow soldering
CNC drilling machine for PCB drilling
Automatic placement and soldering machines and re
flow soldering
CNC drilling machine for PCB drilling
Automatic placement and soldering machines
Lecture, demonstration, physical inspection of PCBs
Textbook:
References:
Printed Circuit Board Designer's Reference by Chris
Robertson
PCB Systems Technical Publications Listing --http://www.mentor.com/products/pcb/
Signal Integrity Issues and Printed Circuit Board
Design by Douglas Brooks
301
September 2012
Second Group Common Module and Courses

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
16
Project and Presentation
The module Project and Presentation helps students to learn research
techniques, solving real world problems. It improves skill in presenting
their findings and report orally and in well documented form. The students
will also learn in working as a team in their semester projects.
- Learn methodologies/techniques and process of doing research
projects.
- Develop their presentation skills both in written and oral form
with/without the aid of audiovisual equipment
- Familiarize themselves in addressing and solving real world
engineering problems.
Total ECTS of the 7

module
Time allocation
7*27=189
Course Number
ECEG-5161
ECEG-5162
Lecture
0
Tutorial
Lab/prac
48
96
Course Name
Semester Project
302
Home study
45
ECTS
2
5
September 2012

Wolait Sodo University, College of Engineering
Course Title: Research Methods and
Presentation: 3 (0,3,0)
ECTS Credit: 2
Module: Project and Presentation

to be Acquired
Pre-requisites:
Senior Standing
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA.
To enable students to understand and apply

Methodologies/techniques and process of doing
research projects.
Presentation skills both in written and oral form
with/without the aid of audiovisual equipment.
Research methods: necessity, types and levels of
researches; problem formulation, modeling &
experimentation; data collection/generation and
processing; Presentation skills: research and project
proposals,; oral presentations formats; applications of
audiovisual equipment; Management aspect of Research
and Development (R&D) works and outputs: discussion
forums; intellectual property rights; management of R&D
works.
Research methods
Necessity, types and levels of researches;
Information sources and means for R&D works;
Problem formulation, modeling &
experimentation; Data collection/generation and
processing
Presentation skills
Research and project proposals: Proposals and
their essence (for research, project, case studies,
etc); Formats and contents of proposals; Technical
report writing (TRW): What are TRW/s and why
do we need them; Types of technical reports - to
technical audience vs general audience (policy
makers); Formats & contents of technical reports;
Format/content of a research article to be
303
Literature
September 2012
contributed to a technical journal; Grammatical,

punctuation and idiomatic techniques of TRW
Oral presentation skills: Refreshment on listening,
reading, composition and oration as well as
English grammatical skills; Knowledge and
application of some widely used key vocabularies
in engineering and science; Outlining and
formatting oral presentations; Applications of
audiovisual equipment and software (multimedia)
- overhead projectors, slide projectors and MSPowerPoint presentation; Personal preparation for
presentation
Management aspect of Research and Development
(R&D) works and outputs
Discussion forums and participants roles seminars, workshops, panel discussions conference
etc; participation in and/or coordinating forums;
Intellectual Property Rights (ownership) and
means of protections; Management of finalized,
active and prospective R&D works and themes
Assignments (70%), Mid-Semester Exam (0%), and Final
Exam (30%)
Textbook:
References:
-
304
September 2012

Course Title: Semester Project: 2 (0,0,6)
ECTS Credit: 5
Module: Project and Presentation

to be Acquired
Laboratory Exercise
Literature
Pre-requisites:
Senior Standing
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA.
To enable students to
Identify problems and propose a solution in the
Electronic Communication focus area
Work in groups to solve real world problems
Present their works
A semester project that addresses specific problem areas
in the Electronic Communication Engineering. The
students are given guides from their project advisor(s) to
analysis and solve the problems
Project Work
Documentation (30%), Presentation (30%), and Advisor
evaluation on progress of the project activity (40%)
Attendance 100 %
Textbook:
References:
-
305
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
18
Management Skills
The module Management Skills helps students to learn managerial skills
in engineering areas.
- Learn Industrial management and organization; Industrial plant
design; Effective material management; Management and resource

allocation; and Engineering economy.
- Learn the idea of entrepreneurship
- Get initiated for towards entrepreneurship
- Be introduced Quality control concept and techniques; the procedures
for implementing quality engineering tools in industrial applications;
basic metrology and applied statistics for quality control applications
in discrete-item manufacturing systems.
module
Time allocation
Lecture
12*27=324
96
Course Number
MENG-5182
MENG-5183
MENG-5181
Tutorial
Lab/prac
96
0
Course Name
Industrial Management and Engineering Economy
Entrepreneurship
Quality Management
306
Home study
132
ECTS
4
4
4
September 2012

Course Title: Industrial Management and
Engineering Economy: 3 (2,2,0)
Course Number: MENG-5182
ECTS Credit: 4
Module: Management Skills

to be Acquired
Laboratory Exercise
Pre-requisites:
Senior Standing
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA.
The course enables students to understand basic

principles / concepts of:
Industrial management and organization;
Industrial plant design;
Effective material management;
Management and resource allocation; and
Engineering economy.
Basic Management Concepts and Industrial
Organization: Introduction to management;
Functions of management; Organizational structure;
Basics of productivity.
Plant Design: Basics of plant Layout; Study of Plant
Layout; Ergonomics and Industrial Safety
Forecasting: Meaning and use of forecasting;
Forecasting techniques
Materials Management: Purchasing; Inventory
control
Project Management and Resource Allocation: Work
breakdown structure; Project organization, Network
scheduling; Projects crashing; Resource allocation,
Project risks
Investment Evaluation: Total investment costs;
Projects financing; Financial evaluations
Basic Accounting Principles & Budgeting
Fundamentals: Classification of accounts;
Accounting concepts; Accounting statements;
Budgets and budgetary control
none
Lectures supported by tutorials, Seminars, presentations
and Industrial visits
307

Literature
September 2012

Attendance 100 %
Textbook
Daniel Kitaw, Industrial Management and
Engineering Economy
References:
Riggs James L. Production Systems: Planning,
Analysis & Control, New York: John Wiley & Sons
Inc. 1970.
Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production systems,
and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing , 2nd
Edition, Asia, Pearson Education, 2001
Moore, James M. Plant Layout and Design, New
York ; Macmillan Company, 1962
Muther , Richard Systematic Layout Planning,
London, Industrial International Limited, 1962
Turner, Joe H. Mize, Kenneth E. Case, Introduction
to Industrial and System Engineering, Prentice Hall
Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey,1978
Kurtz, Max P.E., Hand Book of Industrial
Management, New York: McGraw Hill Inc., 1984, 19
Peter Atrill & Eddie McLaney, Accounting and
Finance for Non specialist, New Delhi:, Prentice
Hall of India, 2001
308
September 2012

Course Title: Entrepreneurship: 3 (2,2,0)
ECTS Credit: 4

to be Acquired
Laboratory Exercise
Literature
Pre-requisites:
Senior Standing
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA.
To familiarize students to the idea of entrepreneurship

and initiate their attitude for entrepreneurship.
What it takes to be an entrepreneur
How to assess markets to identify new opportunities
How to value a new business idea
Fundamentals of Finance
Fundamentals of marketing
How to protect intellectual property
How to put together a successful business plan
How to solicit funding
How to hire and grow a start-up business
How to partner for success
none
Minimum of 75% attendance during lecture hours;
100% attendance during practical work sessions,
except for some unprecedented mishaps; and
Presence during industrial visit/ visits.
Textbook
References:
-
309
September 2012

Course Title: Quality Management: 3 (2,2,0)
ECTS Credit: 4

to be Acquired
Pre-requisites:
none
Semester: IX
Lecturer: TBA.
The objective of the course is to introduce the student to

Quality control concept and techniques;
The procedures for implementing quality
engineering tools in industrial applications;
Basic metrology and applied statistics for quality
control applications in discrete-item manufacturing
systems.
Concept of quality and quality control; Probability
distribution and histogram; Inference about process
quality; type-I error (-error) and type II error (-error);
Design of control chart, average run length for chart
performance, control charts for variables, control charts
for attributes, and control charts; Introduction to modern
quality control techniques; Quality costs; Basic statistical
tools; control charts; Process capability, use of quality
control software.
Introduction to Statistical Quality Control:
Applications, organization, cost aspects
Theory of Control Charts: Control charts for
attributes; average run length for chart performance.
Acceptance Sampling: Multiple and sequential
sampling plans; Acceptance sampling by variables.
OC Ourve: Producers and consumers risk
TQC and TQM
Strategies for Implementing Quality Systems:
General implementation strategies; The Malcom
Baldridge Award; ISO 9000; The Deming Prize;
Quality Function Deployment; Other strategies; ISO14000.
Reliability Study and Analysis: Design for
reliability
310

Laboratory Exercise
Literature
September 2012
none
Minimum of 75% attendance during lecture hours;
100% attendance during practical work sessions,
except for some unprecedented mishaps; and
Presence during industrial visit/ visits.
Textbook
Montgomery, D.C, 2001, Introduction to Statistical
Quality Control, 4th edition, John Wiley and Sons
Farnum, Nicholas R., Modern Statistical Quality
Control and Improvement.
References:
Daniel Kitaw, Industrial Engineering, AAU
Feigenbaum A., Total quality control, Mc GrawHill
Inc., Singapore
Juran J M, Quality control Hand Book, McGraw Hill
company, London
311
September 2012

Module Number
Rationale and
objective of the
module
19
Thesis
In the Thesis module students will enhance their problem identification
and solving skill
- Do their B.Sc. Thesis for completing their study.

module
Course Name
Course Number
ECEG-5191
B.Sc. Theiss
ECTS
12
312
September 2012

Course Title: B.Sc. Thesis: 6 (0,0,18)
ECTS Credit: 12
Module: Thesis

to be Acquired
Laboratory Exercise
Literature
Pre-requisites:
All Senior Standing Courses
Semester: X
Lecturer: TBA.
To enable students to enhance their problem solving

skills, all students must carry out an independent (to the
possible extent) research project. The study should be
Problem oriented
Community based
Scientifically and ethically acceptable
Feasible, and
Action oriented
The B.Sc. Thesis in the Electronic Communication Focus
is the final element of the B.Sc. study program. The main
goal of this course is to develop the individual creative
and problem solving ability of graduates. Students will
receive an individual project specification from various
areas and work them out individually under the
supervision of faculty advisor or/and professional advisor
from the industry. The candidate use all the theoretical
knowledge and practical skill he obtained during his/her
study to solve the engineering problem in a scientific way
which includes problem analysis, solution, verification,
implementation, documentation, and presentation. B.Sc.
project is defended in front of the official committee at
the end of the study
Thesis Work
Individual thesis works supported by advisors guide line
Documentation (30%), Presentation (30%), and Advisor
evaluation on progress of the project activity (40%)
100%
Textbook:
References:
-
313
314
September 2012

WSU ECEG Five Years Program Guide

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

WSU ECEG Five Years Program Guide

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Wolaita Sodo University

Electrical Engineering, Bachelor of Science

Regular Five Year Program

Wolaita Sodo, September 2012

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PROGRAM.................................................................... 11

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Electrical Power Focus Modules and Courses ............................................................... 172

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Academic Background of Students

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Professional Profile: is a set of key occupational tasks.

Research and Development

Installation, Operation and Maintenance

Analysis and Testing

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Sales, Consultation and Purchase

Basic Abilities, Skills

Profiles for Streams (Focus Areas)

Electrical Engineer with Electronic Communication Engineering Focus

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Design and maximize the utilization of communication network efficiently and

Electrical Engineer with Electrical Power Engineering Focus

Electrical Engineer with Computer Engineering Focus

Electrical Engineer with Industrial Control Engineering Focus

Electrical Engineer with Microelectronics Engineering Focus

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Bachelor of Science Program

1. Through the experience of other Universities that have been offering

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Structure of the Curriculum

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

1 Common Assessment Semester

Industry Internship Semester

2 Focus Area Semesters

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Lecture Oriented Categories

b) Scientific and Engineering Fundamentals Category

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

c) Core Electrical Engineering Category

d) Electronic Communication Engineering Focus

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

e) Electrical Power Engineering Focus

f) Computer Engineering Focus

g) Industrial Control Engineering Focus

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

To solve industry problems that can result in maximum efficiency and

h) Microelectronics Engineering Focus

Practice Oriented Categories

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Internship (Industry Placement)

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

for the industry.

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Teaching-Learning Methods and Materials

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

The European Credit Transfer System (ECTS)

WSU ECEG Five Years Program

Courses List per catagory